Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 288

ROUGH DRAFT

{ServiceManual}{RoughDraft}{HealthImaging}

Publication No. 2H7443


DRAFT - 18SEP00
Supersedes 2H7443
29JUN99

HEALTH IMAGING
SERVICE MANUAL
for the
Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 50/100/200
Service Codes: 3744, 3433, 1539
and the
Kodak PACS LINK DICOM PRINT SERVER
Kodak Home Page
on Internet Service Code: 3745

Tech Bulletin Medical Image Manager 100

on Intranet

Table of Contents

H174_0088AC

© Eastman Kodak Company, 2000


PLEASE NOTE The information contained herein is based on the experience and knowledge relating to the subject matter gained by Eastman Kodak
Company prior to publication.
No patent license is granted by this information.
Eastman Kodak Company reserves the right to change this information without notice, and makes no warranty, express or implied,
with respect to this information. Kodak shall not be liable for any loss or damage, including consequential or special damages,
resulting from any use of this information, even if loss or damage is caused by Kodak’s negligence or other fault.

This equipment includes parts and assemblies sensitive to damage from electrostatic
discharge. Use caution to prevent damage during all service procedures.

Table of Contents
Description Page

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Disks and CDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Unpacking the MIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
MIM 200, MIM 100 and MIM 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
DICOM PRINT SERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Configuring the LAPTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Installing the MIM Service Software from CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Installing the Laptop Software from Floppy Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Installing the Laptop Basic Software V_2.0 for the MIM 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Installing the Data Access Objects (DAO) 3.0 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Installing the Service Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Installing the Laptop Basic Software V_3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Installing the Laptop Basic Software V_3.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Installing the Keypad Firmware Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Installing Software: MIM Digital V_2.2, Video 150 Board V_1.3, MIM 100 V_A1.10. 3-16
Installing TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Installing Dial-Up Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Installing “Direct Connect to NT” and Configuring the Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443
Installing a “Dial-Up Networking” Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Connecting the Laptop to the MIM Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Connecting to the MIM Products Using “Dial-Up Networking”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Connecting the Service Application to the Local or Passthrough MIM Product . . . . 4-1
Disconnecting the MIM Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway 5-1
Checking the Service Tracking Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Configuring the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Configuring the Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Configuring the HIS/RIS GATEWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Configuring the Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Configuring the Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Configuring the MIM for the Autofilming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Adjusting the Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Defining Black and White Values (Using the Advanced Leveling Feature) . . . . . . . . 6-10
Using [Auto Setup] to Configure the VIDEO 60 BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Configuring the VIDEO 60 BOARD that is Not Pre-Staged. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Configuring the Input for the Video 150 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Configuring the Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Configuring the MIM for the Autofilming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Using [Auto Setup] to Configure the MIM 100/VIDEO 150 BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Configuring the Video 150 Board that is Not Pre-Staged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Configuring the Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Configuring the Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Configuring the MIM Product for the Autofilming Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Configuring the Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Managing the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Configuring the Network Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Configuring the KEYPAD for Date Format and Operating Language . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Changing the Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Setting the Disk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Saving the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Restoring the Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Configuring the Modality Store Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Installing the External MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Changing to Remote Service Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 3


Displaying the Activity and Error Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Setting the Logging Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Displaying the Activity History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Activity History Log Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Displaying the Error History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Example of the Error History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Displaying the Error Frequency log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Clearing the Frequency Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Beep Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Configuring the BIOS and Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Troubleshooting the MIM 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Diagnostics for the OPTICAL INTERFACE (OI) BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Troubleshooting the CPOI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Store and Print a Test Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Network Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
Assignment of SLOTS for the MIM 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Updating the Software for the MIM Products or for the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Installing the New Software for the MIM Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Reverting to a Previous Version of MIM Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Enabling Software Licenses for the MIM 100, MIM 200, and MIM 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Replacing the HARD DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Updating the MIM Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Replacing the CPU BOARD of the MIM 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Conversions for the MIM 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Converting Interface from Video to Digital or Digital to Video (for the MIM 100 only) 15-1
Converting from 4MB DIGITAL BOARD to 8MB DIGITAL BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Conversions for the MIM 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Converting a MIM 50 from Single Input to Multiple Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Theory Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Instructing the Operator and Key Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Training Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Proficiency Checklist for the MIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
Providing Service Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
SCAN Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Service Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Mod 1 FILM MAILER for Unqualified Modalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
Modality Specification Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5


6 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443
Introduction

Section 1: Introduction

Using this Manual


This SERVICE MANUAL instructs qualified field personnel how to install and configure the MM products.

Note
The term “MIM products” refers to the MIM 50, MIM 100, MIM 200, DICOM Print Server or Distributed Medical Image Spooler. The term “MIM” refers to the MIM 50,
MIM 100, or the MIM 200.

Important
• Before you configure the Release 3.x equipment or any MIM products, you must install software on the service LAPTOP.
– See “Configuring the LAPTOP” on Page 3–1..
– Usually, you will complete the software installation procedures during training.
• The LAPTOP must be connected to the product before you can use the Service Application. See “Connecting the Laptop to the MIM Products” on Page 4–1..
• Read the procedures in this manual carefully:
– The Introduction in many of the sections directs you to important information for that specific section.
– The end of certain sections and procedures instruct you to advance to correct procedures; For example, the end of Section 1: “Introduction” indicates the
remaining procedures necessary to complete installation and configuration.
– We recommend that you use the LAPTOP to display the “Checklist” in the “Help” menu to mark each step that you complete to keep track of your work.
– Some procedures will direct you to data in associated tables. Remember that you might have to return to the procedure when you are finished using the table.
– Instructions are included for configuring the VIDEO 60 BOARD of the Kodak DISTRIBUTED MEDICAL IMAGE SPOOLER. See Section 6: “Configuring the
Input for the Video 60 Board”.
– The Kodak DICOM PRINT SPOOLER, Model 100 is also referred to as the CP DICOM Input Package or DP SPOOLER.
– The Kodak DICOM PRINT SERVER is also referred to as the DP SERVER.
• This manual does not include a section for “Adjustments and Removals.” See the ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST, publication No. 8B8186 to determine:
– Correct settings for SWITCHES and JUMPERS on CIRCUIT BOARDS
– How to remove the COVER, BOARDS, DISK DRIVES, and the POWER SUPPLY

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 1–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Prerequisites

Important
To effectively use this manual, the FE must have the following prerequisite training:
• CP Fundamentals
• Use of the LAPTOP and Windows 95/98
• Kodak Digital ScienceÔ MEDICAL LASER PRINTER 190 and the Kodak DICOM PRINT SPOOLER, Model 100 (PIU)

Special Tools
Special Tools for the MIM and Related Products
Tool No. Item Description
TL-5224 DIRECT CONNECT LAPTOP CABLE DB09, female to female, 3 m (10 ft)

Signal Information for the DIRECT CONNECT LAPTOP CABLE TL-5224:


(From PIN on one end of the CABLE to PIN on the other end of the CABLE.)
From PIN To PIN Signal
3 2 Transmit Data
2 3 Receive Data
7 8 Request to Send
8 7 Clear to Send
6, 1 4 Data Set Ready and Carrier
5 5 Signal Ground
4 6, 1 Data Terminal Ready

1–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Introduction

Disks and CDs

Important
See “Procedures: Loading the Software for the LAPTOP from CD-ROM” on Page 3–1. for the disks and CDs that you will need to install.

Feedback

Important
See Section 20: “Providing Service Feedback” for correct feedback procedures.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 1–3


SERVICE MANUAL

Documentation
Documentation for the Release 3.0 Products
Publication Product Pub. No. Date Notes
SITE SPECIFICATIONS Kodak PACS Link MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER100 8B8180 JUL00
Kodak PACS Link MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200
Kodak PACS Link DICOM PRINT SERVER 3H9040 JUN99
Kodak DISTRIBUTED MEDICAL IMAGE SPOOLER/Video 3E0800 JUN99 Includes specifications for the
Kodak DISTRIBUTED MEDICAL IMAGE SPOOLER/Digtal Kodak 3600 DISTRIBUTED
Kodak DISTRIBUTED MEDICAL IMAGE SPOOLER/DICOM MEDICAL IMAGER.
USER’S GUIDE Kodak PACS Link MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 2E4003 MAY99
Kodak PACS Link MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 50 3H8821 MAY99
Kodak PACS Link DICOM PRINT SERVER 3H8820 APR99
Kodak DISTRIBUTED MEDICAL IMAGE SPOOLER/Video, /Digital 2E4085 JUN99
Kodak DISTRIBUTED MEDICAL IMAGE SPOOLER/DICOM 3H8822 JUN99
Introduction to the Kodak PACS Link MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 5E9823 JUN00
200
User’s Guide for MIM 200 with Display Keypad 5E9763 JUN00
User’s Guide for MIM 200 with Print Keypad 5E9764 JUN00
User’s Guide for MIM 200 with Touchscreen Keypad 5E9765 JUN00
Working with the 3600 Imager for MIM 200 5E9966 JUN00
Working with the 1200 Imager for MIM 200 5E9967 JUN00
User’s Guide for MIM 100 with software version 3.2 6E7662 JUN00
QUICK REFERENCE Kodak Digital Science MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 2E4004 MAY99 Laminated Card
Kodak PACS Link MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 50 3H8158 MAY99
SERVICE MANUAL Kodak PACS Link MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 50/100/200 2H7443 SEP00 On-line and Hardcopy. Includes
Kodak PACS Link DICOM PRINT SERVER instructions to install the
equipment. Includes instructions
to configure the input for the
SPOOLER/Video and
SPOOLER/Digital

1–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Introduction

Publication Product Pub. No. Date Notes


INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Kodak DISTRIBUTED MEDICAL IMAGE SPOOLER/Video, /Digital 2E4190 JUN99 Includes instructions to install
Kodak DISTRIBUTED MEDICAL IMAGE SPOOLER/DICOM 3H8823 JUN99 the Kodak 3600 DISTRIBUTED
MEDICAL IMAGER.
Installation Guide for MIM 200 with Display Keypad and 3600/1200 3H9284 JUN00
Imagers
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST All 8B8186 SEP00 On-line and Hardcopy
WALL MOUNTING TEMPLATE Kodak Digital Science MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 7C1509 1997

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 1–5


SERVICE MANUAL

Standards and Shortcuts Used in the Manual


Tool Description Standard Action Example
KEYBOARD Typing input, a command Type: input 1. Type the input text that is indicated in bold text. Type: cd/
for example. 2. Press [Return]
Typing Input that is specific Type: <name> 1. Type site specific information. Type: <Printer 1>
to a site or system. 2. Press [Return]
Pressing function keys. Press [key] or Press Press the key. If you are instructed to press more than one key, press Press [Control] + [p]
[key] + [key] and hold the first key, then press the second key.
Advancing to the next field Press [Tab] Press the [Tab] key. Use this feature
in a screen or menu. when you have to
make several entries
in a menu.
MOUSE Selecting a BUTTON on the Select “button” or Place the cursor on the BUTTON and click the MOUSE. Select “OK” or
screen or menu. Select [button] Select [Start]
Opening a folder icon or Open “file” Place the cursor on the file or icon and double click the MOUSE. Open “Inbox”
other icon.
Opening a menu item from Open “file” or Select Place the cursor on the indicated file or icon and click the MOUSE. Select “Settings” /
the Windows [Start] button. “file1” / “file2” /... “file n” “Control Panels”
Enabling or Disabling a Enable “feature” or Place the cursor on the box or circle and click the MOUSE to either: Select “Terminate
feature indicated by a Select “feature” • Enable the feature: Place a checkmark or bullet in the object. Video Input”
RADIO BUTTON. • Disable the feature: Remove the checkmark or bullet from object. Disable “Terminate
Video Input”
The “Tool Bar” of the To display the function of the [Hot Key], place the cursor on the [Hot
“Service Application” Key].
window contains [Hot
Keys].

1–6 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Installation Instructions

Section 2: Installation Instructions

Unpacking the MIM


Unpacking the MIM 100 or MIM 100 without a Relay Board (NR)
PACKING MATERIAL

CONTAINER for CPU STAND

CONTAINER for
POWER CABLE
FOOTSWITCH / MINI KEYPAD

USER’S GUIDE

CONTAINER for KEYPAD


KEYPAD CABLE
EXTENSION CABLE

PACKING MATERIAL

MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100

PACKING MATERIAL

H156_0055DCA
H156_0055DC

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 2–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Caution
The SHOCK DETECTOR on the CARTON changes from clear to red if damage occurred during shipping.
[1] Check that:
• the SHOCK DETECTOR is clear 0.
• the PRODUCT LABEL on the CARTON indicates that the equipment is configured for the correct Modality. See the graphic of the LABEL on the next page.
[2] Open the CARTON.
[3] Remove the contents.

Note
At this time, this manual does not include illustrations for unpacking the MIM 200, MIM 50, DICOM PRINT SERVER, or SPOOLER.

Note
Be sure to insert the separate section of the User’s Manual for interfaces that are delivered with the MIM. There will be a separate section for each interface, like a
KEYPAD, that the Field Engineer must insert in the Customer’s User’s Manual. The tab dividers will already be in the binder for the User’s Manual.

2–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Installation Instructions

Important
Check the label on the outside of the shipping box for the connectivity information and check that you have the right unit for the site. The graphic below shows the labels.

8.000 0.125
(optional)

S/N K#

INPUT 1
Modality
5.000 INPUT 2
Modality

INPUT DICOM YES NO

MODEM YES NO

12.000 0.125
(optional)
MIM 200 Customer Ordered Accessories
(Packed Inside)
Catalog Number Quantity Catalog Number Quantity
117 4234 109 7120
Primary Gray Scale Video Input Print Delivery S/W to DMI 1200
164 9177 142 5389
Secondary Gray Scale Video Input Print Delivery S/W to DMI 3600
129 5724 104 2993
Color Video Input Print Delivery S/W to KELI 160
137 6557 104 1607
8.000 Digital Input Print Delivery S/W to KELP 1120
115 8070 801 9598
MIM (Touchscreen) Keypad Print Delivery S/W to KELP 2180
127 0339 135 5064
MIM Print Keypad DICOM Print Software
174 0265 887 8472
MIM Display Keypad DICOM Store Software
159 8580 897 9841
Ethernet 10/100 Base T Output HIS/RIS Connection Software
160 9957 139 7751
Output for KELP 2180/1120 Modem

H180_0045DC

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 2–3


SERVICE MANUAL

MIM 200, MIM 100 and MIM 50


Connecting the Hardware

Important
Before you install the product, the customer must install:
– all network CABLING
– all 42 m (138 ft) and 45 m (148 ft) CABLES
– optional WALL MOUNT for the MIM 100
– analog telephone line for MODEM
• To view the “Checklist,” which will help you check that you complete all necessary activities,
– Display the “Service Application” window on the LAPTOP.
– Select “Checklist” under “Help.”
• See the SITE SPECIFICATIONS and the ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST for correct CABLING: See “Documentation” on Page 1–4.
• The product containing the VIDEO 150 BOARD must be energized if the IMAGING DEVICE is in use (Passthrough video) and it provides only one video output
connection to the MONITOR. See the graphics on pages 2–4 and 17–15.
Video IMAGING DEVICE with one Video Output to the MONITOR (Non-Terminated Passthrough) See “Terminate Video Input” on Page 17–15.
IMAGING
DEVICE MIM

VIDEO IN

VIDEO OUT

IMAGING DEVICE
MONITOR

75 OHMS
H156_0114BC

[1] Locate the MIM with the internal MODEM CARD. For an external MODEM, see “Installing the External MODEM” on Page 10–1 and the ILLUSTRATED PARTS
LIST.

2–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Installation Instructions

[2] Determine with the customer where you will install the MIM.
[3] Check that the customer’s VIDEO CABLE provides the correct video signal. See the SITE SPECIFICATIONS.
[4] Use the “Checklist,” “Parts List,” and the table below to help you connect the correct CABLES to the MIM Products:

Graphics to Help You Connect CABLES to the MIM Products


DICOM PRINT
CABLE MIM 100 MIM 50 MIM 200 SERVER
VIDEO (BNC) or DIGITAL (RS-485) Page 2–6 Page 2–9 Page 2–9 Not Applicable
KEYPAD Page 2–6 Page 2–9 Page 2–9 Page 2–10
SERIAL AUTOFILMING LINK Page 2–6 Page 2–9 Page 2–9 Not Applicable
Ethernet Connections Page 2–6 Page 2–9 Page 2–9 Page 2–10
FOOTSWITCH or MINI KEYPAD (optional) Page 2–8 Connect the CABLE to the top of Connect the CABLE to the top of Not Applicable
the DISPLAY KEYPAD. the DISPLAY KEYPAD.
KEYBOARD (optional) Page 2–8 Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable
Power Page 2–6 Page 2–9 Page 2–9 Page 2–10
MODEM CABLE Page 2–6 Page 2–9 Page 2–9 Page 2–10
Fiber OPTIC CABLE Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Page 2–10

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 2–5


SERVICE MANUAL

BULKHEAD of the MIM 100 with Relay Board

LP FIBER RS-485 VIDEO VIDEO UTP MODEM


RS-422
IN OUT
R R

Thickwire

KEYPAD G G
RS-232

B B Thinwire
SCSI

SERVICE

H/C SYNC V SYNC ATM

AC POWER
ON/OFF SWITCH
FUSE COVER
H156_0006HCA
H156_0006HC

2–6 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Installation Instructions

BULKHEAD of the MIM 100 without Relay Board


RS-485

UTP
IN OUT

or
VIDEO MODEM

KEYPAD AUTO FILM

C/H SYNC V SYNC


Label: Serial Number
and Service Code
KEYPAD AUTO FILM

LP FIBER

MODEM/
SERVICE COM 2

blue green

H156_0170HCA
H156_0170HC

Note
The MIM 100NR does not contain a RELAY BOARD or RS-232 PORT. The VIDEO and DIGITAL PORTS of the MIM 100NR reside on removable BULKHEAD PLATES.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 2–7


SERVICE MANUAL

TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD of the MIM 200, MIM 100, MIM 100NR, and the MIM 50 starting with V_3.2.x
Cable 3m

Mini Keypad

Keyboard
Footswitch
dig
ita
ls
cie
nc
FO e
RM
AT
=
24

CO
PIE EN
S= EX D
AM
1

MA
ME IN
NU

H156_0116HCA
H156_0116HC

2–8 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Installation Instructions

Bulkhead of the MIM 50 and the MIM 200


MIM 50 MIM 200

Switch Switch
115/230 V 115/230 V

Digital or Video ComPort


Interface
LAN
(RJ-45) Digital
COM 4
Interface
1 2 3 4 5 6 (Autofilming) 1 2 3 4 5 6
LAN Fiber-optic

AUTOFILM
(RJ-45) Phone Phone Port or
(optional) (optional) Network

UTP
Adapter Port
KEYPAD
UTP SERVICE

Telco
(RJ-11)
MODEM/

Telco
COM 2

(RJ-11)

COM 1

COM 2
COM 1
COM 1
Video
Interface
COM 5
COM 2
(Keypad) COM 2
(not used)
(not used)

H180_0023HCA
H180_0023HC

Note
This graphic shows a single-input MIM 50. COM 1 on both the MIM 50 and the MIM 200 is for MODEM/SERVICE.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 2–9


SERVICE MANUAL

Bulkhead of the DICOM Print Server and the MIM 200


DP Server MIM 200

Switch Switch
115/230 V 115/230 V

ComPort

LAN
(RJ-45) Digital
COM 4
Interface
Fiber-optic 1 2 3 4 5 6 (Autofilming) 1 2 3 4 5 6
Port Fiber-optic

AUTOFILM
Phone Phone Port
(optional) (optional)

UTP
KEYPAD
LAN
UTP SERVICE

Telco
(RJ-45)
(RJ-11)
MODEM/

Telco
COM 2

(RJ-11)

COM 1

COM 2
COM 1
COM 1
COM 5 Video
(Display Keypad) Interface
COM 2
(not used) COM 2
(not used)

H180_0024HCA
H180_0024HC

Note
COM 1 on both the DP SERVER and the MIM 200 is for MODEM/SERVICE.

2–10 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Installation Instructions

Bulkhead of the MIM 200

Com 4 5
2
Phone
Com 5
3 (optional)
Telco
Com 6 (RJ-11)

Com 7
Digital Adapter Cable
Switch
Com 8 115/230 V
Com Port
Adapter Cable Com 9

Video J1 Video1 In
Interface J2 Video1 Out
4
J3 Video2 In

J4 Video2 Out

J5 Video3 In

J6 Video3 Out 1 2 3 4 5 6
LAN
Video Adapter J7 Csync In (RJ-45)
Cable
J8 Csync Out

Color Video Color Key: Labels on PC

UTP

UTP
J1 Red In
Interface J2 Green In Label Color
4
J3 Blue In AUTOFILM Green
COM 1

COM 2

J4 Sync In
KEYPAD Blue
J5 Red Out
even COM Green
J6 Green Out COM 1
odd COM Blue
Color Video J7 Blue Out
COM 2
Cable J8 Sync Out H180_0004DCA
(not used) H180_0004DC

Note
These same CABLES could be used on a multiple input MIM 50.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 2–11


SERVICE MANUAL

Installing the “Modality Store” Feature of the MIM 100

Important
• This procedure instructs you how to modify the FOOTSWITCH 335818 to enable the connection of the KEYPAD directly to the MODALITY.
• The following connection provides a reference voltage for isolated SWITCH CONTACTS.
[1] Cut off the FOOTSWITCH.
[2] Strip back the INSULATION and foil 0.5 in.
[3] To install the BNC or the OEM CONNECTOR on the CABLE:
• BNC: Connect the blue wire to the + 5 V line of the Modality and the blue/white wire to the ground of the Modality.
• OEM CONNECTOR: See the instructions for the CONNECTOR provided by the OEM.
[4] Cut back the DRAIN wire. Do not terminate the DRAIN wire.
[5] Remove the FERRITE CORE from the plastic packaging:
• FERRITE CORE for the KEYPAD: 903739
• FERRITE CORE for the FOOTSWITCH: 231230

Important
The FERRITE CORE must be installed not greater than 0.25 in. from the CONNECTOR of the KEYPAD.
[6] Fasten the FERRITE CORE to the CABLE of either the KEYPAD or the FOOTSWITCH.
[7] Do the procedure “Configuring the Modality Store Feature” on Page 9–8.

2–12 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Installation Instructions

DICOM PRINT SERVER


Installing the CPOI in the 2180 or 1120 LASER PRINTER
SERVICE CODE LABEL for Models 2180 and 1120
Important

• Before you install the DICOM PRINT SERVER or MIM 200, check that you
have the correct hardware, including the DISTRIBUTION BOARD, SERIAL
CONTROL LINK CABLE, and FIBER OPTIC CABLE.
• Check that the LASER PRINTER and existing interfaces contain the most
recent software versions.
• If you are installing a DICOM PRINT SERVER or MIM 200 in an existing
LASER PRINTER, you must complete all instructions in this procedure.

SERVICE
• If you are installing a DICOM PRINT SERVER or MIM 200 in a pre-staged
3746
CODE
LASER PRINTER, it already contains the COMMON PROTOCOL OPTICAL
INTERFACE (CPOI). Advance to Page 2–21.

SERVICE CODE LABEL [1] If necessary, install the correct software for the LASER PRINTER and
H174_0062ACA existing interfaces.
H174_0062AC
[2] De-energize the LASER PRINTER.

Warning

• Dangerous voltage.
• The edges of the BULKHEAD might be sharp.
[3] Disconnect the POWER CORD.
[4] Install the SERVICE CODE LABEL.
[5] To prepare the LASER PRINTER for installation, advance:
• Step 6 for the 2180 LASER PRINTER
SERVICE
3746
CODE • Step 10 for the 1120 LASER PRINTER

SERVICE CODE LABEL


H174_0063ACA
H174_0063AC

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 2–13


SERVICE MANUAL

2180 LASER PRINTER [6] Use a T15 TORX BIT to remove the SCREWS and all BULKHEAD
PLATES.

Note
For information on removing the BULKHEAD PLATES from the 2180 LASER
PRINTER, see the SERVICE MANUAL for the CPDI, SM3219-1, Page 2-7.

SCREWS

BULKHEAD PLATE

H133_3020CCB
H133_3020CA

2–14 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Installation Instructions

1120 LASER PRINTER [7] Disengage and remove the FRONT CONTROL UNIT COVER.
[8] Remove the remaining 3 bottom COVERS from the LASER PRINTER.

Note
For more information on removing the COVERS and the EMI SHIELDS from the
1120 LASER PRINTER, see the SERVICE MANUAL for the CPDI, SM3219-1,
Pages 2-18 and 2-19.
[9] Loosen the 14 SCREWS from the left and right EMI SHIELDS. Remove the
EMI SHIELDS.
[10] Remove the BULKHEAD PANEL.
[11] Remove the black BULKHEAD PLATE from the position that will contain the
CPOI.
LATCH (2)

FRONT CONTROL H129_0600ACB


UNIT COVER H129_0600AC

BULKHEAD PANEL

BLANK
BULKHEAD
U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 H129_1208ACA
H129_1208AC

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 2–15


SERVICE MANUAL

PICL CABLE REMOVAL TOOL


Caution
RIBBON CABLE
• To prevent damage of the PINS on the CONNECTOR, use the PICL CABLE
REMOVAL TOOL TL-4465 to install or remove the 50-PIN RIBBON CABLE.
• Before you connect the FIBER OPTIC CABLE, remove the protective covers
from it and from the DISTRIBUTION BOARD.
• The FIBER OPTIC CABLE is keyed for correct insertion.
[12] Remove the protective covers.
[13] Insert the FIBER OPTIC CABLE into the DISTRIBUTION BOARD until you
hear the CONNECTOR click into position.
TL-4465

H133_3004ACD
H133_3004AC

DISTRIBUTION BD AY for the Model 1120 [14] Connect the 2 CABLES to the DISTRIBUTION BULKHEAD AY:
• FIBER OPTIC CABLE
SERIAL CABLE J701
• DISTRIBUTION/CPU SERIAL CABLE: J701 to P701

FIBER OPTIC CABLE

DISTRIBUTION
BOARD

H133_2051ACA
H133_2051AC

2–16 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Installation Instructions

DISTRIBUTION BD AY for the Model 2180 [15] If the LASER PRINTER is a Model 2180, connect the AUXILIARY CES
PORT CABLE to J702.
[16] Install the DISTRIBUTION BOARD AY in an unused position of the
BULKHEAD PANEL.
DISTRIBUTION/CPU
SERIAL CABLE J701
Warning

• To provide maximum ESD protection, you will be instructed to connect the


POWER CORD. Do not energize the LASER PRINTER.
• Dangerous voltage.
• Use ESD protection.
[17] Connect the POWER CORD.

AUXILIARY CES
PORT CABLE J702

FIBER OPTIC CABLE

H133_2054CCA
H133_2054CC

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 2–17


SERVICE MANUAL

BUS GRANT (BG) and IACK JUMPERS


BG JUMPERS Important

• See the publication “Configurations for the COMMON PROTOCOL


B B B B B B INTERFACES” Publication 699621 dated 3/95 to determine which IACK and
G G G G G G
0 0 0 0 0 0
BUS GRANT JUMPERS to install on or remove from the CARD RACK.
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
• The CPOI can be installed in any SLOT that a CPDI can be installed in.
3 3 3 3 3 3
• The JIACK JUMPER must be installed if the1120 LASER PRINTER contains
SLOT 2
SLOT 3

SLOT 4

SLOT 5

SLOT 6

SLOT 7

SLOT 8
the Kodak Ektascan NETWORK INTERFACE.
• For the 1120 LASER PRINTER, routing of the FIBER OPTIC CABLE is
IACK IACK IACK IACK IACK IACK easier if you use SLOT 9.
[18] Install or remove the correct IACK and BUS GRANT JUMPERS.

IACK JUMPERS H133_3000ACB


H133_3000AA

CPOI BOARD and Model 2180


Caution
Touch the CPOI only at the HANDLES.
SCREW (2)
[19] If necessary, install the correct version of firmware.
[20] Install the CPOI.
HANDLE (2)

Caution

• The FIBER OPTIC CABLE and the CPOI contain PROTECTIVE COVERS.
• The FIBER OPTIC CABLE is keyed for correct insertion.
[21] Remove the PROTECTIVE COVERS.
[22] Advance to the correct step:
(a) For the Model 2180, advance to Step 23.
CPU/PORCH SLOT
H133_2053ACA
H133_2053AC
BOARD Ay (b) For the Model 1120, advance to Step 25.

2–18 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Installation Instructions

Routing of the CABLES for the Model 2180 [23] For the 2180 Laser Printer, route the FIBER OPTIC CABLE and
DISTRIBUTION/CPU SERIAL CABLE to the front of the CPOI.
SERIAL CABLE
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
[24] Advance to Step 26.

P403

CPOI

H133_2052CCA
H133_2052CC

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 2–19


SERVICE MANUAL

Routing of the CABLES for the Model 1120


SERIAL CABLE Important
Fastening both the SERIAL CABLE and FIBER OPTIC CABLE using the upper
CABLE CLIP provides access to the FIBER OPTICS PORT on the CPOI.
[25] For the 1120 Laser Printer, route the FIBER OPTIC CABLE and
DISTRIBUTION/CPU SERIAL CABLE to the front of the CPOI.
[26] Assemble the LASER PRINTER.
[27] Energize the LASER PRINTER.
[28] Advance to the procedure “Installing the DICOM PRINT SERVER” on Page
2–21.
FIBER
OPTIC
CABLE
CARDRACK

CLAMP (2)
H133_2055ACA
H133_2055AC

2–20 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Installation Instructions

Installing the DICOM PRINT SERVER


Bulkhead of the DICOM Print Server and the MIM 200
DP Server MIM 200

Switch Switch
115/230 V 115/230 V

ComPort

LAN
(RJ-45) Digital
COM 4
Interface
Fiber-optic 1 2 3 4 5 6 (Autofilming) 1 2 3 4 5 6
Port Fiber-optic
AUTOFILM

Phone Phone Port


(optional) (optional)

UTP
KEYPAD

LAN
UTP SERVICE

Telco
(RJ-45)
(RJ-11)
MODEM/

Telco
COM 2

(RJ-11)

COM 1

COM 2
COM 1
COM 1
COM 5 Video
(Display Keypad) Interface
COM 2
(not used) COM 2
(not used)

H180_0024HCA
H180_0024HC

[1] Connect:
• DATA CABLE and also connect the DISPLAY KEYPAD CABLE to its assigned COMM PORT numbred cable
• DATA CABLE and also connect the DISPLAY KEYPAD CABLE to COM 5 for the DICOM PRINT SERVER
• Ethernet (UTP) CABLE to the RJ-45 PORT
• AC POWER CORD and, if required, the RJ-11 to “Telco”
[2] Remove the DICOM PRINT SERVER or MIM 200 from the SHIPPING CONTAINER.
[3] Route the external FIBER OPTIC CABLE to the CPOI BULKHEAD of the PRINTER.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 2–21


SERVICE MANUAL

Caution
Use care when you route the FIBER OPTIC CABLE. Do not place the FIBER OPTIC CABLE on the floor.
[4] Connect the FIBER OPTIC CABLE to the DICOM PRINT SERVER or MIM 200 and then advance to the procedure “Completing the Installation.”

Completing the Installation

Important
• The correct version of the “Service Application” must be loaded on the LAPTOP before installation of these products. Typically, you installed this software during
training.
• Use this page to determine what procedures you must complete, especially when you need some help to determine what to do next.
• Use the “Checklist” in “Help” to check that you complete all necessary procedures.
• See any necessary documentation for the MEDICAL LASER PRINTER 190 (MLP190).
[1] If the LAPTOP is not configured, advance to “Configuring the LAPTOP” on Page 3–1, complete the procedures, and return to this page.
[2] To connect the LAPTOP, advance to “Connecting the Laptop to the MIM Products” on Page 4–1, complete the procedure, and return to this page.
[3] In the following table, do the procedures indicated (x) for the MIM product that you will install:

Procedures to be Completed for Installation


Video Digital Optical
MIM 50 or MIM 50 or DP
Procedure Page MIM 100 SPOOLER MIM 200 MIM 100 SPOOLER MIM 200 SERVER MIM 200
Checking the Service Tracking Information 5–1 x x x x x
Configuring the Network 5–4 x x x x x
Configuring the Destination 5–6 x x x x x
Configuring the HARD DISK as a Destination 5–35 x <V_3.0 N/A x <V_3.0 N/A N/A
Configuring the HIS/RIS GATEWAY 5–39 x N/A x N/A N/A
Configuring the Input 5–42 7–2 6–2 6–2 8–2 8–2 8–2 9–2
Saving the Configuration 9–7 x x x x x

[4] Set the MIM product for Remote Service access. See Page 10–1.
[5] Call the TSC to check that the MODEM operates correctly and to provide the MODEM number to the TSC.
[6] For the MIM 100 and MIM 200 with a TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD, create the Customer Profile. See the USER’S MANUAL.
[7] Check your work. To see how to print test images from the KEYPAD or the LAPTOP, see Page 12–21.

2–22 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Installation Instructions

• MIM: Store a few pages of clinical images using the KEYPAD or Autofilming link; print the pages to the destination; check that the image quality is acceptable.
• DICOM PRINT SERVER or MIM 200 as a PRINT SERVER: Print a greyscale test image.

Note
Be sure to insert the separate section of the User’s Manual for interfaces that are delivered with the MIM. There will be a separate section for each interface, like a
KEYPAD, that the Field Engineer must insert in the Customer’s User’s Manual. The tab dividers will already be in the binder for the User’s Manual.
[8] Train the customer. See “Instructing the Operator and Key Operator” on Page 19–1.
[9] For an unqualified modality only, send the FILM MAILER (Mod 1) with the test films enclosed. See “Mod 1 FILM MAILER for Unqualified Modalities” on Page 20–3.
[10] Provide feedback for your service time. See “Providing Service Feedback” on Page 20–1.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 2–23


SERVICE MANUAL

2–24 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the LAPTOP

Section 3: Configuring the LAPTOP

Introduction

Important
• Study the Table below to help make yourself familiar with the correct order for installing the software.
• If your LAPTOP has not been connected to a Release 2.x (or above) product, do all procedures in the order indicated in the Table “Procedures: Loading the Software
for the LAPTOP from CD-ROM” below.
• If your LAPTOP has been connected to a Release 2.x product, but not to a Release 3.x product, complete only the following procedures:
– “Installing the LAPTOP Basic Software V_3.5” on Page 3–14.
– “Installing the Service Software for the Release 3.0 product” on Page 3–10.
• If the LAPTOP contains a Network Card, you cannot connect to the MIM products using “File” / “Local”.
• To connect to a MIM 200 or any MIM product with V_3.2 software, the service application must be installed.

Procedures: Loading the Software for the LAPTOP from CD-ROM


Order of
Section 3 Name of Folder containing the
Procedures Page Procedure: Installing the Software on the CD Name of CD Notes
1 3–2 Laptop Basic Software Version _2.0 LapBasic Service Laptop DAO V_3.00 files, Data Link
Software for MIM Library (DLL) Files, and Modem
Based Products Files
2 3–2 Data Access Objects (DAO) 3.0 Files No disks (part of the Laptop Basic Same as above See above.
Software V_2.0
3 3–3 Service Software S_sw_a18 Same as above Modality Database, Help Files
4 3–3 Laptop Basic 3.0 Laptop30 Same as above DAO V_3.5 files.
5 3–4 Service Software V_2.1 S_sw_2_1 Same as above Modality Database, Help Files
6 3–4 Laptop Basic 3.5 Laptop35 Same as above
7 3–4 Service Software V_3.0 S_sw_3_0 Same as above Modality Database, Help Files
8 3–4 Service Software V_3.1 S_sw_3_1 Same as above
9 3–4 Laptop Basic 3.6 mim laptop basic 3.6 Same as above
10 3–4 Service Software V_3.2 mimservice3.2 Same as above
11 3–5 Service Software V_3.2.1 mimservice3.2.1 Same as above
12 3–5 Keypad Firmware Update 1.0.4 Key_104 Same as above

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 3–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Order of
Section 3 Name of Folder containing the
Procedures Page Procedure: Installing the Software on the CD Name of CD Notes
13 3–5 Keypad Firmware Update 1.0.5 Key_105 Same as above
14 3–5 Keypad Firmware Update 1.0.7 Key_107 Same as above
15 3–5 MIM Digital V_2.2 Mim_Dig Same as above
16 3–6 MIM 100 Application A1.10 Mim_100 Same as above
17 3–6 Video 150 Board Firmware 1.3 V150_1_3 Same as above
18 3–17 TCP/IP No software required Part of operating system
19 3–18 Dial-up Networking No software required Part of operating system
20 3–19 Direct Connect to NT No software required Part of operating system
21 3–20 Dial-up Networking Icon No software required Part of operating system

Installing the MIM Service Software from CD-ROM

Important
The CD-ROM “Service Laptop Software for MIM Based Products” 8B1016 replaces the multiple disks that used to be sent to the field.
[1] Insert the CD into the CD-ROM DRIVE of the LAPTOP.
[2] Install the MIM LAPTOP BASIC SOFTWARE V_A2.0 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “Laptop Basic”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Next] in each of the 4 screens that the LAPTOP displays.
(d) Click [Finish].

Important
In Step [3] (i), if the LAPTOP displays the message “Missing DLL,” click [OK] to complete the installation. This message does not indicate a malfunction.
[3] Install the “Data Access Object” files:
(a) Select “Start” / “Settings” / “Control Panel”.
(b) Open “Add/Remove Programs”.

3–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the LAPTOP

(c) Click:
1. [Install]
2. [Next]
3. [Browse]
(d) At the “C:\” prompt, double-click the “C:\” prompt and then open the folder “Program Files”.
(e) Open:
1. “KHID”
2. “DAO”
(f) Double-click “Setup.exe”.
(g) Check that the “Run Installation Program” window displays “C:\Program Files\KHID\DAO\Setup.exe”.
(h) Click [Finish] and then click [Next].
(i) At the message “DAO Setup Complete,” select [OK].
(j) To check your work, select “Start” / “Settings”/ “Control Panel” / “Add/Remove Program”.

Note
The screen displays “Data Access Objects (DAO) 3.0” if the software is correctly installed.
[4] Install the MIM SERVICE SOFTWARE V_A1.8:
(a) Double-click “S_sw_a1.8”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].

Important
In the Step [5] (f), all check boxes must be clear or de-selected.
[5] Install the MIM LAPTOP BASIC SOFTWARE V_3.0 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “Laptop30”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Next].
(d) Select “Jet 3.5”.
(e) Click [Next].
(f) Observe that all check boxes are clear.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 3–3


SERVICE MANUAL

(g) Click [Next].


(h) Click [OK].
[6] Install the MIM SERVICE SOFTWARE V_2.1 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “S_sw_2.1”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].

Important
Depending on what software is on your LAPTOP, you might have to click [Yes] one or more times in Step [7] (d).
[7] Install the MIM LAPTOP BASIC SOFTWARE V_3.5 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “Laptop35”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Next].
(d) Click [Yes] each time the screen asks you if you want to overwrite an existing file.
(e) Click [Finish].
[8] Install the MIM SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.0 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “S_sw_3_0”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[9] Install the MIM SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.1 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “S_sw_3_1”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[10] Install the MIM LAPTOP BASIC SOFTWARE V_3.6 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “MIM Laptop Basic 3.6”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Yes].

3–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the LAPTOP

(d) Click [Finish].


[11] Install the MIM SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.2 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “MIM Service 3.2”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[12] Install the MIM LAPTOP SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.2.1 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “MIM Service 3.2.1”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[13] Install the MIM KEYPAD FIRMWARE V_1.04 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “key_104”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[14] Install the MIM KEYPAD FIRMWARE V_1.05 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “key_105”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[15] Install the MIM KEYPAD FIRMWARE V_1.07 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “key_107”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[16] Install the MIM DIGITAL FIRMWARE V_2.2 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “Mim_Dig”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Yes].

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 3–5


SERVICE MANUAL

(d) Click [Finish].


[17] Install the MIM 100 APPLICATION SOFTWARE V_1.10 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “Mim_100”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[18] Install the MIM VIDEO FIRMWARE V_1.3 on the LAPTOP:
(a) Double-click “V150_1_3”.
(b) Double-click “Setup”.
(c) Click [Yes].
(d) Click [Finish].
[19] Do the procedures on Pages 3-?? through 3-??.

3–6 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the LAPTOP

Installing the Laptop Software from Floppy Disks

Important
• Study the Table below to help make yourself familiar with the correct order for installing the software.
• If your LAPTOP has not been connected to a Release 2.x (or above) product, do all procedures in the order indicated in the Table below.
• If your LAPTOP has been connected to a Release 2.x product, but not to a Release 3.x product, complete only the following procedures:
– “Installing the LAPTOP Basic Software V_3.5” on Page 3–14
– “Installing the Service Software for the Release 3.0 product” on Page 3–10
• If the LAPTOP contains a Network Card, you cannot connect to the MIM products using “File” / “Local”.
• To connect to a MIM 200 or any MIM product with V_3.2 software, the service application must be installed.

Procedures: Loading the Software for the LAPTOP from FLOPPY DISKS
Order of
Section 3
Procedures Page Procedure: Installing the Name of the Software on the Disk Disks Notes
1 3–7 Laptop Basic Software Version _2.0 Laptop Basic Software Version _A2.0 for the MIM 100 3 DAO V_3.0 files, Data Link Library
(DLL) FIles, and Modem FIles
2 3–9 Data Access Objects (DAO) 3.0 Files No disks. 0 See above.
3 3–10 Service Software Service Software Version_A1.8 for the MIM 100 1 Modality Database, Help Files
4 3–12 Laptop Basic 3.0 Part Number 3H8071 Date 1998/06/24 3 DAO V_3.5 files.
5 3–10 Service Software V_2.1 MIM Service S/W Ver. 2.1 P/N 3H8652 2 Modality Database, Help Files
6 3–14 Laptop Basic 3.5 MIM Laptop Basic S/W Ver. 3.5 P/N 2E4217 2
7 3–14 Laptop Basic 3.6 Laptop36
8 3–10 Service Software V_3.0 MIM Service S/W Ver. 3.0 P/N 2E4208 2 Modality Database, Help Files
9 Service Software from CD-ROM MIM Service S/W Ver. 3.1 P/N 8B1016 1
10 Service Software from CD-ROM MIM Service S/W Ver. 3.2 P/N TBD 1
11 3–15 Keypad Firmware Update 1.0.4 P/N 3H8087 Date 06/29/1998 1
12 3–15 Keypad Firmware Update 1.0.5 MIM Keypad Firmware Version 1.0.5 Part No. 3E0846 1
13 3–15 Keypad Firmware Update 1.0.7 Key_107
14 3–16 MIM Digital V_2.2 MIM Digital Firmware V_2.2 P/N 3H6051 1
15 3–16 Video 150 Board Firmware 1.3 MIM Video Firmware V_1.3 Part #6C7763 1
16 3–16 MIM 100 Application A1.10 MIM 100 Application S/W V_A1.10 3

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 3–7


SERVICE MANUAL

Order of
Section 3
Procedures Page Procedure: Installing the Name of the Software on the Disk Disks Notes
17 3–17 TCP/IP No disks. 0 In the U.S. this software, which is
18 3–18 Dial-up Networking No disks. 0 prerequisite to connectivity, is
19 3–19 Direct Connect to NT No disks. 0 Included in Windows 95.

20 3–20 Dial-up Networking Icon No disks. 0

Installing the Laptop Basic Software V_2.0 for the MIM 100

Important
• The “MIM Laptop Basic Software V_2.0” allows you to communicate with the Release 2.x product through the LAPTOP. The DISKS labelled “LAPTOP Basic
Software,” contain the following files:
– Data Link Library (DLL), which are driver files that allow you to execute the service application
– Data Access Objects (DAO) V_3.0
– MODEM
[1] Connect the FLOPPY DISKETTE DRIVE to the LAPTOP.
[2] Energize the COMPUTER.
[3] Insert the DISK 1 into the A: DRIVE.

Note
The title on DISK 1 is “Laptop Basic Software Version_2.0 for the MIM 100”
[4] Select “Start/Settings/Control Panel”.
[5] Open “Add/Remove Programs”.
[6] At the “Add/Remove Program Properties” window, select “Install”.
[7] At the “Install Program from Floppy Disk or CD ROM” window, select “Next”.
[8] At the “Run Installation Program” window, check that the path is correct: “A:/SETUP.EXE”.
[9] Select “Finish”.

Note
The COMPUTER displays a “Setup” window, indicating the status of “Install Shield.”

3–8 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the LAPTOP

[10] At the “Welcome to Kodak Digital Science ds” window, select “Next”.

Note
In the following steps, select “Back” to display the previous screen.
[11] Read the “Welcome” screen. If necessary, exit any open Windows programs.
[12] Select “Next”.
[13] Read the “Read me Information” screen. Select “Next”.
[14] Read the “Start Copying Files” screen. Check that the information is correct:
(a) Setup Type: Complete
(b) Target Folder: “C:\Program Files\KHID”
(c) User Information
[15] Select “Next”.

Note
The COMPUTER will display the progress of the installation.
[16] When the COMPUTER displays “Setup Needs the Next Disk”:
(a) Remove the existing DISK and insert the next DISK
(b) Select “OK”
[17] Read the information in the “Setup Complete” screen and then select “Finish”.
[18] Eject the last setup DISK.
[19] To check that the “Laptop Basic Software V_2.0” is installed, select “Start”/ “Settings”/ “Control Panel” / “Add/Remove Program”. If the software is installed, the
LAPTOP displays the “Laptop Basic Software”.
[20] Advance to the procedure “Installing the Data Access Objects (DAO) 3.0 Files” on Page 3–9.

Installing the Data Access Objects (DAO) 3.0 Files

Important
See Page 3–1 for the correct order for installing the software before you begin.
[1] Select “Start” / “Settings” / “Control Panel”.
[2] Open “Add/Remove Programs”.
[3] Select:
(a) “Install”
(b) “Next”

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 3–9


SERVICE MANUAL

(c) “Browse”
[4] At the “C:\” prompt, double click on the “C:\” prompt and then open the folder “Program Files”.
[5] Open:
(a) the folder “KHID”
(b) “DAO”
[6] Double click on the program “Setup.exe”.
[7] Check that “Run Installation Program” window displays “C:\Program Files\KHID\DAO\Setup.exe”.
[8] Select:
(a) “Finish”
(b) “Next”

Important
If the LAPTOP displays the message “Missing DLL,” select “OK” to complete the installation. This message does not indicate a malfunction.
[9] At the message “DAO Setup Complete,” select “OK.”
[10] To check that the “Data Access Objects (DAO) Files” are installed, select “Start”/ “Settings”/ “Control Panel” / “Add/Remove Program”. If the software is installed,
“Data Access Objects (DAO) 3.0” displays in the list.
[11] Advance to “Installing the Service Software V_A1.8” on Page 3–10.

Installing the Service Software

Important
• Use this procedure when you are instructed to install each version of the Service Software in “Loading the Software for the LAPTOP from CD-ROM” on
Page 3–1: V_A1.8, V_2.1, V_3.0
• See Page 3–1 for the correct order for installing the software before you begin.
• The Service Software enables you to execute the following actions:
– Configure the product.
– Display Error Logs and Activity Logs. Diagnose the MIM.
– Upgrade Firmware and Software.
– View database information for qualified destinations and Modalities.
[1] Insert the DISK into the A:DRIVE.
[2] At “Control Panel,” open “Add/Remove Programs”.

3–10 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the LAPTOP

[3] At the “Add/Remove Programs Properties” window, select “Install”.


[4] At the “Install Program from Floppy Disk to CD-ROM” window, select “Next”.
[5] At the “Run Installation Program” window, check that the path is correct: “A:\SETUP.EXE”.
[6] Select “Finish”.
[7] At the “License Agreement” window, select “Yes”.

Note
The COMPUTER will display the following messages in the order indicated:
• “Setup” window, indicating the status of “Install Shield”.
• “Decompressing Files In: C:\Program Files\KHID\AX.X”; The term “AX.X” indicates the version number.
• “Status”
[8] At the “Setup Complete” window, select “Finish” and eject the DISK.
[9] To check that the software is installed, select “Start”/ “Settings”/ “Control Panel” / “Add/Remove Programs”. If the software is installed, Service Application x_ will
display where x indicates the version number.
[10] Advance to the correct procedure: If you just completed installing
• Service Software V_A1.8, advance to “Installing the Laptop Basic Software V_3.0” on Page 3–12.
• Service Software V_2.1, advance to “Installing the Laptop Basic Software 3.5” on Page 3–14.
• Service Software V_3.0, advance to “Installing the Keypad Firmware Updates” beginning on Page 3–15.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 3–11


SERVICE MANUAL

Installing the Laptop Basic Software V_3.0

Important
• See Page 3–1 for the correct order for installing the software before you
begin.
• “Laptop Basics Software V_3.0” is required for communication with the MIM
V_2.0 through the LAPTOP. The DISKS labeled “LAPTOP Basic Software,”
contain the “Data Access Objects (DAO) V_3.5” files.
[1] Connect the FLOPPY DISKETTE DRIVE to the LAPTOP.
[2] Energize the COMPUTER.
[3] Insert the DISK 1 into the A: DRIVE.
[4] Select “Start/Settings/Control Panel”.
[5] Open “Add/Remove Programs”.
[6] At the “Add/Remove Program Properties,” window, select “Install”.
[7] At the “Install Program from Floppy Disk or CD ROM,” window, select
“Next”.
[8] Check that the “Run Installation Program” window displays
“A:\SETUP.EXE”.
[9] Select “Finish”.

Note
The COMPUTER displays a “Setup” window, indicating the status of “Install
Shield”.
[10] At the “Data Access Objects” (DAO) setup window, select “Next”. The
following messages might appear: “The OLE automation DLL,
OLEAUTO32.DLL could not be found or is an older version that is
incompatible with DAO3.5. If you continue DAO will not register
properly. Continue anyway?” This message does not indicate a problem.
Select “Yes” to continue.

Note
In the following steps, to display the previous screen, select “Back”.
[11] Read the “Welcome” screen. If necessary, exit any open Windows 95
programs.
[12] Select “Next”.

3–12 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the LAPTOP

[13] At the “Select Components” screen, select “Jet 3.5” only, then select “Next”.
[14] At the next “Select Components” screen, make sure all components are not
selected, then select “Next”.

Note
The COMPUTER displays the progress of the installation.
[15] When the COMPUTER displays “Setup Needs the Next Disk”:
(a) Remove the existing DISK
(b) Insert the next DISK
(c) Select “OK”
[16] Read the information in the “setup Complete” screen and then select
“Finish”.

Important
The computer might display the message “Data Access Objects (DAO)
installation failed.” This message does not indicate a problem.
[17] Select “OK” to complete installation.
[18] Eject the last setup DISK.
[19] To check that the “Laptop Basic Software V_3.0” is installed, go to the
Desktop and select “Start’/’Settings’/’Control Panels’/’Add/Remove
Program Properties”. If the software is installed, “Data Access Objects
(DAO) 3.5” displays in the list.

Important
Now you must install Service Software V_2.1.
[20] To install Service Software V_2.1, do the procedure “Installing the Service
Software” on Page 3–10.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 3–13


SERVICE MANUAL

Installing the Laptop Basic Software V_3.5

Important
• See Page 3–1 for the correct order for installing the software before you begin.
• “Laptop Basics Software V_3.5” is additional software required for communication with the Release Version 3.0 products through the LAPTOP.
[1] Connect the FLOPPY DISKETTE DRIVE to the LAPTOP.
[2] Energize the COMPUTER.
[3] Insert the DISK 1 into the A: DRIVE.
[4] Select “Start”/ “Settings” / “Control Panel” / “Add/Remove Programs”.
[5] At the “Add/Remove Program Properties,” window, select “Install”.
[6] At the “Install Program from Floppy Disk or CD ROM,” window, select “Next”.
[7] Check that the “Run Installation Program” window displays “A:\SETUP.EXE”.
[8] Select “Finish”.

Note
The COMPUTER displays a “Setup” window, indicating the status of “Install Shield”.
[9] At the “Software License” window, select “Yes”.

Important
In Step 10, carefully read the prompts, which will direct you to insert DISK 1 and 2 again.
[10] When the COMPUTER displays “Setup Needs the Next Disk”:
(a) Remove the existing DISK
(b) Insert the next DISK and then select “OK”
[11] Read the information in the “Setup Complete” screen and then select “Finish”.
[12] Enable the radio button “Yes, I want to restart my computer now?” by placing a check in it. Then select [Finish].
[13] Eject the last setup DISK.
[14] To check that the “Laptop Basic Software V_3.5” is installed, go to the Desktop and select “Start”/ “Settings”/ “Control Panel” / “Add/Remove Program”.
If the software is installed, the list will display “Laptop Basic Software V_3.5”.

Important
Now you must install Service Software V_3.0.
[15] To install Service Software V_3.0, do the procedure “Installing the Service Software” on Page 3–10.

3–14 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the LAPTOP

Installing the Keypad Firmware Update

Important
• See Page 3–1 for the correct order for installing the software before you begin.
• Use this procedure to install the following items of software:
– Update 1.0.4
– Update 1.0.5
– Update 1.0.7
[1] Insert the DISK into the A:DRIVE.
[2] At “Control Panel,” open “Add/Remove Programs”.
[3] At the “Add/Remove Properties” window, select “Install”.
[4] At the “Install Program from Floppy Disk to CD-ROM” window, select “Next”.
[5] At the “Run Installation Program” window, check that the path is correct: “A:\SETUP.EXE”.
[6] Select “Finish”.
[7] At the “License Agreement” window, select “Yes”.

Note
The COMPUTER will display the following messages in the order indicated:
• “Setup” window, indicating the status of “Install Shield”.
• “Decompressing Files In: C:\Program Files\KHID\AX.X”; The term “AX.X” indicates the version number.
• “Status”
[8] At the “Setup Complete” window, select “Finish”.
[9] Eject the DISK.
[10] To check that the software is installed, select “Start”/ “Settings”/ “Control Panel” / “Add/Remove Program”. If the software is installed, Service Application x_ will
display where x indicates the version number.
[11] Do this procedure again for each remaining “Update” indicated in the above Important note.
[12] After you have executed this procedure for each Update for the KEYPAD FIRMWARE, advance to Page 3–16

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 3–15


SERVICE MANUAL

Installing Software: MIM Digital V_2.2, Video 150 Board V_1.3, MIM 100 V_A1.10

Important
• See Page 3–1 for the correct order for installing the software before you begin.
• Use this procedure to install each of the following items of software:
– “MIM DIgital V_2.2”
– “Video 150 Board Firmware V_1.3”
– “MIM 100 V_A1.1”
[1] Insert the DISK into the A:DRIVE.
[2] At “Control Panel,” open “Add/Remove Programs”.
[3] At the “Add/Remove Properties” window, select “Install”.
[4] At the “Install Program from Floppy Disk to CD-ROM” window, select “Next”.
[5] At the “Run Installation Program” window, check that the path is correct: “A:\SETUP.EXE”.
[6] Select “Finish”.
[7] At the “License Agreement” window, select “Yes”.

Note
The COMPUTER will display the following messages in the order indicated:
• “Setup” window, indicating the status of “Install Shield”.
• “Decompressing Files In: C:\Program Files\KHID\AX.X”; The term “AX.X” indicates the version number.
• “Status”
[8] At the “Setup Complete” window, select “Finish”.
[9] Eject the DISK.
[10] To check that the software is installed, select “Start”/ “Settings”/ “Control Panel” / “Add/Remove Program”. If the software is installed, Service Application x_ will
display where x indicates the version number.
[11] Do this procedure again for each remaining item of software indicated in the above Important note.
[12] After you have executed this procedure for each item of software indicated above, advance to Page 3–17

3–16 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the LAPTOP

Installing TCP/IP

Important
See Page 3–1 for the correct order for installing the software before you begin.
[1] Select “Start” and then open “Control Panel”.
[2] Open “Network”.
[3] Observe the “network components installed” list in the “Configuration” window:
• If TCP/IP is installed, verify in the window “Primary Network Logon”, the “Client for Microsoft Networks” is selected and then advance to the procedure
“Installing Dial-Up Networking”.
• If “TCP/IP” is not installed, advance to Step 4.
[4] Select “Add”.
[5] At the “Select Network Component Type” window, select “Protocol”.
[6] Select “Add”.
[7] At the “Select Network Protocol” window, select:
• Manufacturer: Microsoft
• Network Protocol: TCP/IP
[8] Select “OK”.
[9] At the “Select Device” window, select “OK”.
[10] At the restart prompt, select “Yes”.
[11] Advance to “Installing Dial-up Networking” on Page 3–18.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 3–17


SERVICE MANUAL

Installing Dial-Up Networking

Important
• See Page 3–1 for the correct order for installing the software before you begin.
• TCP/IP must be installed in “Dial-Up Networking” for communication between the LAPTOP and the Release Version 3.0 product.
[1] At the Task Bar, select [Start] and then, depending on the Operating System, select the correct path:
• Windows 95: “Programs” / “Accessories”
• Windows 98: “Programs” / “Accessories” / “Communications”
[2] Observe the “Accessories” folder for Windows 95 or the “Communications” folder for Windows 98:
• If “Dial-Up Networking” is not installed, advance to Step 3.
• If “Dial-Up Networking” is installed, advance to Page 3–19: “Installing ‘Direct Connect to NT’ and Configuring the Serial Port”:
[3] If “Control Panel” is not open, select “Start” and the open “Control Panel”.
[4] Open “Add/Remove Programs”.
[5] Select:
(a) “Windows Setup”
(b) “Communications”
[6] Check that “Communications” has a checkmark next to it.
[7] Select “Details”.

Important
In the next step, the checkbox for “Dial-Up Networking” must be checked.
[8] If the entry is correct for the “Dial-Up Networking” checkbox, select “OK”.
[9] Select “OK” again.
[10] Follow the directions that the screen displays for restarting the LAPTOP.
[11] Advance to Page 3–19.

3–18 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the LAPTOP

Installing “Direct Connect to NT” and Configuring the Serial Port

Important
See Page 3–1 for the correct order for installing the software before you begin.
[1] Open “Modems” in the “Control Panel” Window.
[2] At the “Modem Properties” window under “General”, select “Add”.

Important
Advance to the correct step:
• Windows 95: Step 3
• Windows 98: Step 4
[3] At the “Install New Modem” menu, select “Other” and then select “Next”.
[4] Select “Don’t Detect my Modem” and then select “Next”.
[5] Select “Have Disk” and then select “Browse”.

Important
In the following step, you might have to change the directory level from “C:\Windows” to the directory indicated.
[6] At the “Open” window, select “C:\Proga~ 1\KHID\Modem”.
[7] At the “Open” window, select [OK] twice.
[8] Select the manufacturer “Generic Modem Drivers” and the model “Serial Cable to Windows NT”.
[9] Select “Next”.
[10] Select “Communications Port (COM 1)” for the 9-Pin SERIAL PORT of the LAPTOP.
[11] Select “Next”.
[12] When the COMPUTER displays the message “Your modem has been set up successfully”, select “Finish” and then “Close”.
[13] Close “Control Panel”.
[14] Advance to the procedure “Creating a ‘Dial-Up Networking’ Icon” on Page 3–20.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 3–19


SERVICE MANUAL

Installing a “Dial-Up Networking” Icon

Important
See Page 3–1 for the correct order for installing the software before you begin.
[1] At the Task Bar, select [Start] and then, depending on the Operating System, select the correct path:
• Windows 95: “Programs”/ “Accessories” / “Dial-Up Networking”
• Windows 98: “Programs” / “Accessories” / “Communications” / “Dial-Up Networking”
[2] At the “Dial-Up Networking” window, select “Make New Connection”.
[3] At the “Make a New Connection” window, type: Connect to MIM products or some other appropriate title.
[4] At the “Select a modem” menu for Windows 95 or the “Select a Device” menu for Windows 98, select “Serial Cable to Windows NT”.
[5] Select “Configure” and then select each of the following tabs and check that the settings are correct:
• “General”:
– Communication Port (COM1)
– Max Speed = 115,200 baud
• “Connection”:
– Data bits = 8
– Parity = None
– Stop bits = 1
• “Optional”: “Display modem status”
[6] Select “Connection” again, then select “Advanced”.
[7] Check that the checkboxes for both “Use Flow Control” and for “Hardware (RTS/CTS)” are selected.
[8] Select “OK” twice and then select “Next”.

Important

• You must enter a phone number before you can exit the “Make New Connection” window.
• The Dial-Up Networking “Connect to” window does not use this phone number.
• Use “Tab” to advance to the next field in the menu.
[9] Type: 111 for the area code; Type: 111-1111 for the phone number.
[10] Select “Next” and then select “Finish”.
[11] Make a shortcut for “Connect to”: See the title assigned in Step 3 above.
3–20 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443
Configuring the LAPTOP

(a) Use the right button of the MOUSE to select “Connect to”.
(b) Select “Create Shortcut”
(c) Select “Yes” to place the shortcut on the desktop
[12] Close the “Dial-Up Networking” window.
[13] Advance to Section 4, “Connecting the Laptop to the MIM Products”.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 3–21


SERVICE MANUAL

3–22 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Connecting the Laptop to the MIM Products

Section 4: Connecting the Laptop to the MIM Products

Connecting to the MIM Products Using “Dial-Up Networking”


Note
The purpose of this procedure is to enable a Remote Access Service (RAS) connection, which is a network connection over a serial line.
[1] Connect the CABLE TL-5224 between the SERIAL PORT of the COMPUTER and the SERVICE PORT of the MIM.
[2] Energize the LAPTOP.
[3] From the desktop of the LAPTOP, open the icon for the shortcut to “Connect to MIM Products”. See “Installing a “Dial-Up Networking” Icon” on Page 3–20.
[4] At the “Connect to” window, type the user name: service
[5] Type the password: service
[6] Select “Connect”. The COMPUTER displays the “Connected to MIM” screen.
[7] Advance to “Connecting the Service Application to the local or passthrough MIM”.

Connecting the Service Application to the Local or Passthrough MIM Product

Important
• The LAPTOP must be connected to the MIM product through “Dial-Up Networking” before you connect the Service Application to the MIM product.
• The beginning and end IP Addresses for the RAS must be configured for passthrough access. See “Configuring the Network” on Page 5–4.
• Only one user can access a MIM product at one time.
• The passthrough feature allows the user to connect to another MIM product over the network.
[1] At the Windows 95 Task Bar, select “Start” / “Programs/MIM Service”.
[2] Open the correct version, usually the most recent version, of the Service Application software.
[3] Type the password: service and then select “OK”.
[4] At the message “Login was successful...”, select “OK”.
[5] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Connect/Local” or “Connect/Passthrough”.
[6] If you select “Connect/Local”, advance to Step 9. If you select “Connect/Passthrough”, advance to Step 7.
[7] At the “Enter the MIM address” window, enter the IP Address of the local or passthrough MIM. The “Connection” window displays.

Note
The IP Address of the MIM is recorded in the following items:
• the “View System Service Information” screen of the MIM product KEYPAD

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 4–1


SERVICE MANUAL

• the card insert located on the COVER of the MIM product


[8] Close the “Connection” window.
[9] If you are connecting the Service Application to the MIM product for the first time, advance to Section 5, “Configuring the MIM”.

Disconnecting the MIM Product


[1] At the “Service Application” window, select “File/Disconnect”.
[2] Select “File/Exit”.
[3] At the window “Connected to Connect to MIM Products,” select “Disconnect”.

Caution

• You must “Shutdown” the MIM products before you de-energize it at the POWER SWITCH.
• To “Shutdown” the MIM product,
– MIM 200 with a PRINTING KEYPAD or a DISPLAY KEYPAD: Select [Menu/System Shutdown].
– MIM 200 with a TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD: Select [Main Menu/Shutdown].
– MIM 100: Use the KEYPAD to press: [Main Menu/Shutdown].
– MIM 50 and DP SPOOLER OR SERVER?: Select [Menu/System Shutdown].
[4] If necessary, de-energize the MIM by turning the POWER SWITCH to the “OFF” position.

4–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Section 5: Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Checking the Service Tracking Information


[1] Connect by Local or Passthrough. If you connect by Passthrough, you’ll
need to enter the correct IP address.
[2] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Service
Tracking Information.”
[3] Check that the information in the “Service Tracking Information” window is
correct. See “Input Parameters: Service Tracking Information” on Page 5–
2.
[4] Did you change information?
• Yes: Select [OK].
• No: Select [Cancel].

Note
• The MIM 100NR indicates a configuration with a modified BULKHEAD,
eliminating the RELAY BOARD that supports the RS-232 Autofilming Link.
• Unless otherwise specified, reference to the MIM indicates all models of the
MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER.
[5] If necessary, check the table to determine what procedure you must follow.
See “Completing the Installation” on Page 2–22.

Note
The screen that is displayed on your system might be slightly different from the
screen that is shown here.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Input Parameters: Service Tracking Information


Input Parameter Description Range
K Number The K Number assigned to this product by manufacturing. 1 -11 alphanumeric characters
Serial Number The Serial Number assigned by manufacturing to the MIM family of products. The “Service 1 - 6 alphanumeric characters
Tracking” window displays the corresponding service code below the Serial Number.
Model Indicates the type of equipment. In versions of software prior to V_3.1, this field could only be DMIS/DICOM
viewed. Now the model can be changed. DMIS/Digital
DMIS/Video
DP SERVER
MIM 50, MIM 200
MIM 100, MIM 100NR
Service Code Indicates the service code of the equipment. See “SCAN Feedback Codes” on
Page 20–1.
Power-On-Hours The number of hours that the MIM has been energized. 1 - 6 numeric digits
The software updates this number every hour. This value will be used for product reliability.
Service Phone Number Telephone number of the local Technical Support Center 0 - 20 alphanumeric characters
NT Product ID Product ID for licensing Windows NT operating system. Must be unique for each MIM. 4 alphanumeric fields
field 1 = 5 characters
field 2 = 3 characters
field 3 = 7 characters
field 4 = 5 characters

5–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Input Parameter Description Range


Software Versions for These fields are viewable only. The words “Software Version” do not occur in any of these 3 - 8 alphanumeric characters
Application Software and fields. x.y.z where
Keypad sections x = major release
Keypad Firmware Version: This field will display a version number only if the Keypad y = minor release
firmware has been upgraded for versions prior to V_3.2. In V_3.2.x the type of interface for z = sub-minor release, optional
the Com Port and the software version will be displayed.
Interface Driver Version prior to V_3.2.x For MIM Application only:
Video or Digital Interface Firmware 3 - 19 alphanumeric characters
MIM Application 1 = release level: development,
alpha, beta
n = sequence number for
successive release level
Interface Type Type: Viewable only. Information for each interface is displayed for MIM 200. Video, Digital, or Optical: 3433,
Serialized Service Code: Viewable only. 3468, 3469, or 3743
Serial Number: See the Data Sheet Enter the Serial Number to
Board/Rev ID, Firmware, and Driver Versions: Viewable only automatically update the other
fields for Interface Type.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–3


SERVICE MANUAL

Configuring the Network


The Service Application allows you to view and modify the parameters for the
TCP/IP and Ethernet BOARD that are necessary to configure the MIM as a
device on the network. Although the RJ45 Ethernet connection is on the CPU
BOARD of the MIM 50 and DP SERVER, you will use the LAPTOP to configure it.

Important
The Remote Access Service (RAS) Server enables access to other MIMs or
network equipment and provides IP addresses for assignments to clients:
• See the Network Administrator for additional IP Addresses: 2 valid IP
Addresses per site are required on the same subnet as the IP Address of the
MIM product.
• The IP Address of MIM 100.100.100.100 cannot communicate to IP Address
of DPS SERVER 123.123.123.10 without the use of gateways. For
successful communication, either the IP Address of the MIM or the
Destination must be changed, or a gateway must be used.
[1] Determine from the customer if you must change any of the factory default
settings listed in the “MIM Network Configuration” window.

Note
The screen that is displayed on your system might be slightly different from the
screen that is shown here.
[2] At the MIM Service Application window, select: “Configure/Network”.
[3] Check for correct information in the “MIM Network Configuration” window.
See “Input Parameters: Network Information” on Page 5–5.
• Node name: Must be unique for all Nodes on Local Area Network (LAN)
• IP Address: See Network Administrator
• Subnet mask: See Network Administrator
• Gateway Address: See Network Administrator
• Transceiver Type: Selectable for the MIM 100 using the network combo
card only
• RAS Server Begin and End IP Address: See Network Administrator

5–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Input Parameters: Network Information


Input Parameter Description Range
Node Name The unique name that identifies the local COMPUTER to TCP/ 1 - 15 alphanumeric characters plus hyphen: “-”
IP. This name typically will be a name that is meaningful for the
location.
IP Address The unique address that identifies a specific node in a network. 4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period
Update the LABEL on the side of the MIM.
Subnet Mask The subnet mask works in conjunction with the IP address to 4 fields (0 - 255) in which each field is separated by a period
subdivide the network into multiple networks.
Gateway Address The IP Address of the router used in wide area network (WAN) 4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period
configuration. The Service Application software does not
require you to enter data in this field.
Transceiver Type The TRANSCEIVER type of the NETWORK ADAPTOR UTP (RJ45) is the only option for the MIM 200, MIM 50 or the DP Server.
Ethernet CARD or BOARD for network communications. This Although the MIM 100 has various options, RJ45 is recommended. The
field is viewable only. following options are only available when using the NETWORK COMBO
CARD 10base:
• UTP (RJ45)
• Thickwire (10 base 5)
• Thinwire (10 base 2)
RAS Server Begin Beginning IP Address of the RAS Server static address pool. 4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period
IP Address This IP Address must be lower than the end IP Address and
located on the same subnet.
RAS Server End Ending IP Address of the RAS Server static address pool. This 4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period
IP Address IP Address must be higher than the beginning IP Address and
located on the same subnet.

[4] If you changed any information, select “OK” and update the LABEL on the side of the unit. If you did not change information, select “Cancel”.
[5] At the message “Changes will take effect the next time the MIM is restarted”, select “OK”.
[6] If you made any changes, reboot the MIM.
[7] If necessary, see Page 2–22 to determine what procedure you must follow.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–5


SERVICE MANUAL

Configuring the Destination


Adding a Printing Device (V_3.2.x and later)

Important
See the tables on pages 5–13, 5–17, and 5–20 for information for the
Destination Parameters.
[1] At the “Service Application” window, select “Configure/Destination”.

Note
If a printing or imaging destination is connected to the MIM, it is a direct
connection, regardless of cable connection type. If the printing or imaging
destination is not directly connected to the MIM, then choose Network.
[2] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select the correct sequence:
• For the DICOM PRINT SERVER and a MIM 200 SERVER: “Add” /
“Print” / “Direct” / “Qualified”
• For the MIM 200 (with no Printer or Imager directly connected) with
conventional KEYPAD and MIM 50: “Add” / “Print” / “Network” /
“Qualified” or “Unqualified”
• For the MIM 100 and MIM 200 (with no Printer or Imager directly
connected) with the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD: Select one of the
following sequences:
– “Add” / “Print” / “Network” / “Qualified” or “Unqualified”
– “Add” / “Store” / “Qualified” or “Unqualified”
[3] At the “Choose a New Direct or Network Destination” window, select the
correct PRINTER from the list and then select “OK”.

Note
Default settings are to be used for Drytone Scaling parameters. If Wet Tone
Scaling parameters are desired, they must be selected at the KEYPAD. To select
Wet Tone Scaling parameters, select Keypad Services from the KEYPAD and
then select the Tone Scaling method, Tone Scaling Curveshape or Tone Scaling
Perception LUT, Curve Shape for Wet values and Perception LUT for dry values.

5–6 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

[4] At the General parameters window, enter the required parameters:


• See “General Parameters” on Page 5–13.
• “Memory” is a required arameter.
Supported Destinations of the MIM and DP SERVER
Print/Network (Qualified) Print/Direct (Qualified)
8100 DMI 1200
8300 DMI 3600
8500 KELI 160
8600 KELP 1120
8700 KELP 2180
8800/8300
8800/8500
8800/8700
800/969HQ
969HQ
969HQT
DMI 1200
DMI 3600
DPServer/KELP 1120
DPServer/KELP 2180
KELI 160
KELP 100XLP - CP DICOM Input Package
KELP 1120 - CP DICOM Input Package
KELP 2180 - CP DICOM Input Package
MLP 190

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–7


SERVICE MANUAL

Important
To continue, advance to the correct step:
• For the MIM: Do Step 5 to the end of the procedure.
• For the DP SERVER: Do Step 8 to the end of the procedure.
[5] For the MIM select “DICOM Info” from the Destination Parameters window.
[6] In the “DICOM Information” window, enter the correct:
• Port Number
• AE Title
• Response Message Timer
[7] Select “OK.”
[8] At the “Destination Parameters” window, select “Media Info.”

5–8 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Important
You must select a media base for each media selected in the “Media” window.
See “Format Types” on Page 5–20.
[9] In the “Media” window, select all media that the customer will use.

Note
The numbers that the “Media Information” window displays on the LAPTOP might
not match the numbers displayed in the screen at left. Numbers are only
displayed for a qualified destination.
[10] Select “OK.”

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–9


SERVICE MANUAL

[11] At the Destination Parameters” window, select “Supported Items”.

Important
• Do not modify any of the items in the table “General Parameters” on Page 5–
13 for a qualified destination unless the TSC instructs you to modify these
items.
• See “Supported Items Parameters” on Page 5–17. Different items will be
indicated, depending on the destination.
• No items are checked for an unqualified destination. Check with the TSC for
the latest information.
[12] Check that the proper items are selected, then select “OK”.
[13] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select “OK”.
[14] To store this configuration, at the “Destination Parameters” window, select
“Set”.

5–10 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

[15] Check that you correctly configured the Destination:


• MIM
1. At the “Service Application” window, select “Diagnostics/Network”
and execute a ping and/or a DICOM echo.
2. Enter the IP Address of the new Destination for a ping. Enter the IP
Address, port number and AE title for a DICOM echo.
3. Select “OK”.
4. Select “Cancel” from the “Network Diagnostics” window.
• DICOM PRINT SERVER
1. On the KEYPAD, press “MENU” / “SELECT”
2. Select “Service Menu” / “Diagnostics Setup” / Test Print Menu” /
Grayscale Print”.
3. Select “Exit Menu” until the KEYPAD displays the “Queued Jobs”
screen.
[16] If necessary, see Page 2–22 to determine what procedure you must
advance to.
If you want to modify or check the parameters for your destination, select the
destination and click Modify.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–11


SERVICE MANUAL

Important

• Do not modify any of the items in the following table for a qualified destination unless directed to do so by the TSC. (See “General Parameters” on Page 5–13.)
• If an item is not checked in the “Supported Item” or “Media Info” windows, the customer will not be able to access that item:
– The KEYPAD of the MIM will not display an unsupported feature or function.
– The DP SERVER will not accept a request for an item unsupported by the destination.

5–12 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

General Parameters

Item Description Range


Logical Name Site-specific name that you must enter for a particular 1 - 9 alphanumeric characters
Destination. The KEYPAD displays this name when the No spaces allowed.
operator selects a Destination. The MIM requires a logical Underscores are allowed.
name that is unique across all currently installed
destinations. The “Logical Name” of the DICOM PRINT
SERVER is the “AE Title”.
IP Address (This will be Site-specific address that uniquely identifies the Destination 4 fields of 0 - 255 where each field is
blank for a Direct option.) on the network. The Service Application for the MIM separated by a period:
requires the user to enter a value. Duplicate IP Addresses For example: 149.110.98.10
for installed destinations are acceptable as long as the The default value for DMI 1200 is
DICOM AE Titles are unique for each destination. This field “LPT1:”; otherwise there is no default
is not configurable for a direct connect DMI 1200 or a direct value.
connect printer that is using the DICOM Print Server.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–13


SERVICE MANUAL

Item Description Range


Database Name The name of the Destination if it is being installed using a 1 - 13 alphanumeric characters
known destination from the qualified destination database.
This field is viewable only.
Model The model of the Destination. The product uses this data to 1 - 12 alphanumeric characters.
optimize the page format validation for the particular MLP190, DMI 1200 and 3600,
Destination. This field is viewable only. MLP 190 and KELP Kodak Ektascan LASER PRINTERS,
XLP are not valid options for a direct connect printer MEDICAL VIEWING STATION (MVS),
destination. MEDICAL IMAGE and INFORMATION
LIBRARY (MIIL), KELI 160, 9410
PACS Link System, and Med Rad
Works.
Memory The amount of memory in megabytes residing in the 1 - 99
Destination. The product uses this value to perform format For the MLP 190, enter “30”. For the
validation. This value is site-specific. The Service KELP 2180, 1120, and 100 XLP,
Application requires a value in this field. obtain page store information from the
printer’s CES port.
Node ID The node assigned to the CPOI board in the 1120 or 2180 1 - 6. Default is 6.
LASER PRINTER. Node ID must be unique and not conflict
with any node IDs that are assigned to any installed CP
Interfaces in the KELP. The Service Application requires a
value in this field.

5–14 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Media Information

Item Description Range


[Media Info] Select [Media Info] to display the Media Information indicated in this table. N/A
Size Media sizes supported by the Destination. 35 x 43 cm, 35 x 35 cm, 11 x 14 in., 11 x
11 in., 10 x 12 in., 8.5 x 11 in., 8 x 10 in., 4
x 6 in., A4
Maximum Columns Maximum number of printable pixels in the x-direction for a particular media size. 1 - 9999
Maximum columns can be selected for each media size. The product uses this
parameter to perform format validation.
Maximum Rows Maximum number of printable pixels in the y-direction for a particular media size. 1 - 9999
Maximum rows are selectable for each media size with or without common text. The
product uses this parameter to perform format validation.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–15


SERVICE MANUAL

Item Description Range


Maximum Rows with Maximum number of printable pixels in the y-direction for a particular media size. 1 - 9999
Common Text Maximum rows can be selected for each media size with or without common text. The
product uses this parameter to perform format validation.
Types Media types supported by the Destination. Media types can be selected for each media Any, Blue, Clear,
size. “Any” indicates that the Destination will use the media type that matches the media Reflective (Paper), Transparent (Film).
size selected (blue or clear). The selections “Reflective” and “Transparent” are valid for
color printing.

5–16 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Supported Items Parameters

Item Description Range


[Supported Items] Select [Supported Items] to display the supported features indicated in this table. N/A
Collation Collation enables study mode operation at the KEYPAD and requests the Yes, No
Destination to print films together that belong to the same study. Does the
destination support Collation?
Common Text Common Text enables the entry of common text information (including the Yes, No
macros for time/date, etc.) at the KEYPAD for printing at the bottom of each film.
This parameter will also be used by MIM when performing format validation. Does
the destination support Common text?
Tonescaling on Image Basis Tonescaling on Image Basis enables the changing of curve shape in the middle of Yes, No
a page and selecting a curve shape series from the KEYPAD. Does the
destination support Tonescaling on Image Basis?

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–17


SERVICE MANUAL

Item Description Range


Media Bin Default Media Bin Default enables selecting a default media bin at the KEYPAD when the Yes, No
media size/type is not specified by a DICOM input. Does the destination support
this feature?
Pivot Density Pivot Density enables the selection of a pivot density setting from the KEYPAD. Yes, No
Does the destination support pivot density?
Print Quality Print Quality enables the selection of print quality to be used when printing the Yes, No
page from the KEYPAD. (The DMI 3600 and DMI 1200 will support 2 selections:
High/1440 DPI and Standard/720 DPI.) Does the destination support different
printing qualities?
Remote Image Deletion Remote Image Deletion enables delivery of images to the destination as soon as Yes, No
they are captured from the imaging source/image node. Does the destination
support remote image deletion?
Rotation The Rotation parameter will allow the KEYPAD to prevent the customer from Yes, No
selecting a page orientation of landscape for formats that are normally portrait
(and vice versa) from the KEYPAD that is not supported by the destination. It will
also be used by the MIM when performing format validation. Does the product
support page rotation?

5–18 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Interpolation

Item Description Range


[Interpolation] Select [Interpolation] to display the supported features indicated in this table. N/A
Interpolation enables selecting a particular interpolation method from a list of No Magnification,
supported methods from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. Bilinear,
Replication,
Cubic Spline,
Cubic Convolution 2,
Cubic Convolution 3

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–19


SERVICE MANUAL

Format Types

Item Description Range


[Format Types] Select [Format Types] to display the information indicated in this table. N/A
Custom Formats Custom formats enables the selection of formats 101 and 102 from the KEYPAD Yes, No
or from other inputs. This parameter will be used by the MIM when performing
format validation.
Row Symmetric Formats Enables specifying formats that only have a line of symmetry in the vertical Yes, No
direction from an Autofilming Link or over DICOM. This parameter will be used by
the MIM when performing format validation.
Slide Format Enables the selection of slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. This Yes, No
parameter will be used by the MIM when performing format validation.

5–20 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Item Description Range


Super Slide Format Enables the selection of super slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. Yes, No
This parameter will be used by the MIM when performing format validation.
Allowable formats A list of standard formats that the destination supports. This list can be further Yes, No
customized to control what the users see for a specific destination. There will be a
setting for each format (1up, 2up, 4up, etc.).

Formatting Parameters

Item Description Range


[Formatting Parameters] Select [Formatting] to display the Formatting information indicated in this table. N/A
Aspect Ratio Mix on Page Mixed aspect ratio on the same page is supported by the destination. This Yes, No
parameter will be used by the MIM when performing format validation.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–21


SERVICE MANUAL

Item Description Range


Image Size Mix in Std Fmt Is mixed image size on standard format supported by the destination? This Yes, No
indicates if the image size can be changed on a page with a row/column
symmetric format. The images will be scaled differently to print all the images at
the same time. This parameter will be used by the MIM when performing format
validation.
Page Annotation Is page annotation supported by the destination? This indicates if the destination Yes, No
supports the DICOM Annotation Box for specifying the band of text that will be
placed on each film. This parameter will be used by the MIM when performing
format validation.
Requested Size Scale Should the destination scale the requested image to fit the image cell supported Yes, No
by the destination? This indicates if the requested size of the image should be
scaled to match the available image cell area. The printer will place a notice on
the output that indicates that the operation was performed. This parameter will be
used by the MIM when performing format validation.
Requested Size Mix in Row Should all images in a row have the same requested size? This parameter will be Yes, No
used by the MIM when performing format validation.
Trim Is Trim supported by the destination? This enables selecting a border to be Yes, No
printed around each image from the KEYPAD or from other input devices.
Aspect Ratio Mix in Row Mixed aspect ratio in the same row supported by the destination. This parameter Yes, No
will be used by the MIM when performing format validation.
Image Size Mix in Row Is mixed image size in row supported by the destination? This indicates if the Yes, No
image size can be changed in a row independent of the page format. This
parameter will be used by the MIM when performing format validation.
Requested Image Size Is requested image size supported by the destination? This indicates if the Yes, No
destination can print images at a specific size. This parameter will be used by the
MIM when performing format validation.
Requested Size Mix on Page Should all images on the page have the same requested size? This parameter will Yes, No
be used by the MIM when performing format validation.
Supports True Landscape Does the destination support a true landscape orientation? Yes, No
Maximum Images Per Band What is the maximum images per band that is supported by the destination? 1 - 32
Maximum Bands Per Page What is the maximum bands per page that is supported by the destination? 1 - 32
Maximum Image Columns What is the number of maximum image columns that are supported by the 0 - 5000
destination?
Maximum Image Rows What is the number of maximum image rows that are supported by the 0 - 5400
destination?

5–22 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Item Description Range


Pixel Pitch What is the number of pixels per millimeter for the destination? 0 - 32
Minimum Horizontal The number of columns that separate images in the horizontal direction. This 0 - 20
Separation parameter will be used by the MIM when performing format validation.
Minimum Vertical Separation The number of rows that separate image bands in the vertical direction. This 0 - 10
parameter will be used by the MIM when performing format validation.
Trim Width - When Enabled The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y 0-5
direction when trim is on. This parameter will be used by the MIM when
performing format validation.
Trim Width - When Disabled The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y 0-5
direction when trim is not on. This parameter will be used by the MIM when
performing format validation.
Image Pad The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y 0 - 10
direction. This parameter will be used by the MIM when performing format
validation.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–23


SERVICE MANUAL

Image Processing Parameters

Item Description Range


[Image Processing] Select [Image Processing] to display the information indicated in this table. N/A
Color Does the destination support color images? Yes, No
Color/Grayscale Same Page Does the destination allow the user to place color and grayscale images on the Yes, No
same page?
Edge Enhancement This feature enables the user to select edge enhancement related parameters Yes, No
such as modality type and image tone adjustment values from the KEYPAD. Does
the destination support edge enhancement?
Grayscale Are grayscale images supported by the destination? Yes, No
Minify Formerly Decimation. This indicates if the destination can accept images that Yes, No
have actual dimensions that exceed the dimensions of the image cell that the
image will be printed at. Is Decimation supported by the destination?
Maximum Image DMAX What is the maximum image DMAX value that is supported by the destination? 0.0 - 3.8

5–24 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

M952 Usage

Item Description Range


[M952] Select [M952] to display the information indicated in this table. N/A
Minimum Horizontal/Vertical What is the minimum Horizontal and Vertical Magnification value that is supported 0..64
Magnification by the destination? This parameter does not apply to store destinations.
Maximum Horizontal/Vertical What is the maximum Horizontal and Vertical Magnification value that is 0..64
Magnification supported by the destination? This parameter does not apply to store
destinations.
Minimum DMAX for M952 What is the minimum DMAX value that is allowed by the destination when 1.5 - 2.0
Command Devices mapping to click counts?

[17] Return to Page 5–28.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–25


SERVICE MANUAL

Adding a Printing Device (V3.1.3 and earlier)

Important
The tables on pages 5–29, 5–32, and 5–34 provide information for the
Destination Parameters.
[1] At the “Service Application” window, select “Configure/Destination”.
[2] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select the correct sequence:
• For the DICOM PRINT SERVER: “Add” / “Print” / “Direct” / “Qualified”
• For the MIM 50: “Add” / “Print” / “Network” / “Qualified” or “Unqualified”
• For the MIM 100: Select one of the following sequences:
– “Add” / “Print” / “Network” / “Qualified” or “Unqualified”
– “Add” / “Store” / “Qualified” or “Unqualified”
[3] At the “Choose a New Direct or Network Destination” window, select the
correct PRINTER from the list and then select “OK.”

Note
See “Supported Destinations of the MIM and DP SERVER” on Page 5–26. The
asterisk (*) in the table indicates that the DICOM PRINT SPOOLER, Model 100
sends the data to the LASER PRINTER.
Supported Destinations of the MIM and DP SERVER
MIM DP SERVER
“DMI 3600” “DMI 3600”
“DPS / KELP 1120” or “DPS / KELP 2180” “KELP 1120 “
“KELP 1120”* or “KELP 2180”* “KELP 2180 “
“KELP 100 XLP”*
“MLP 190”

[4] At the “Destination Parameters” window, enter the required parameters:


• See “Destination Parameters: Names, Addresses, and DICOM
Information” on Page 5–29.
• “Memory” is a required “Destination Parameter”.

5–26 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Important
To continue, advance to the correct step:
• For the MIM: Do Step 5 to the end of the procedure.
• For the DP SERVER: Do Step 8 to the end of the procedure.
[5] For the MIM select “DICOM Info.”
[6] In the “DICOM Information” window, enter the correct:
• Port Number
• AE Title
• Response Message Timer
[7] Select “OK.”

[8] At the “Destination Parameters” window, select “Media Info.”

Important
You must select a media base for each media selected in the “Media” window.
See “Destination Parameters: Media Information” on Page 5–34.
[9] In the “Media” window, select all media that the customer will use.

Note
The numbers that the “Media Information” window displays on the LAPTOP might
not match the numbers displayed in the screen at left. Numbers are only
displayed for a qualified destination.
[10] Select “OK.”

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–27


SERVICE MANUAL

[11] At the Destination Parameters” window, select “Supported Items”.

Important
• Do not modify any of the items in the table, “Destination Parameters” on Page
5–29 for a qualified destination unless the TSC instructs you to modify these
items.
• See “Destination Parameters: Supported Items” on Page 5–32. Different
items will be indicated, depending on the destination.
[12] Check that the proper items are selected, then select “OK”.
[13] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select “OK”.
[14] To store this configuration, at the “Destination Parameters” window, select
“Set”.
[15] Check that you correctly configured the Destination:
• MIM
1. At the “Service Application” window, select “Diagnostics/Network”
and execute a ping.
2. Enter the IP Address of the new Destination.
3. Select “OK”.
4. Select “Cancel” from the “Network Diagnostics” window.
• DICOM PRINT SERVER
1. On the KEYPAD, press “MENU” / “SELECT”
2. Select “Service Menu” / “Diagnostics Setup” / Test Print Menu” /
Grayscale Print”.
3. Select “Exit Menu” until the KEYPAD displays the “Queued Jobs”
screen.
[16] If necessary, see Page 2–22 to determine what procedure you must
advance to.

5–28 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Destination Parameters: Names, Addresses, and DICOM Information


Item Description Range
Logical Name Site-specific name that you must enter for a particular 1 - 9 alphanumeric characters
Destination. The KEYPAD displays this name when the No spaces allowed.
operator selects a Destination. The MIM requires a unique Underscores are allowed.
“Logical Name”. The “Logical Name” of the DICOM PRINT
SERVER is the “AE Title”.
IP Address Site-specific address that identifies the Destination on the 4 fields of 1 - 254 where each field is
network. The Service Application for the MIM requires the separated by a period:
user to enter a value. Two or more Destinations must not For example: 149.110.98.10
have the same IP Address. Viewable field for the DICOM
PRINT SERVER
Database Name The name of the Destination selected from the Destination 1 - 13 alphanumeric characters
database. This field is viewable only.
Node ID The node assigned to the CPOI in the 1120 and 2180 1-7
LASER PRINTER.
Model The model of the Destination. The product uses this data to MLP190,
optimize the page format validation for the particular Kodak Ektascan LASER PRINTERS,
Destination. This field is viewable only. MEDICAL VIEWING STATION (MVS),
MEDICAL IMAGE AND
INFORMATION LIBRARY (MIIL)
Memory The amount of memory in megabytes residing in the 1 - 99
Destination. The product uses this value to perform format
validation. This value is site-specific. The Service “30” for MLP 190
Application for the product requires that the user enter a
value in this field.
Image Pad Number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in 0 - 10
the x and y direction. The product uses this value to perform
format validation.
Minimum Vertical Number of rows that separate the image bands in the 0 - 10
Separation vertical direction. The product uses this value to perform
format validation.
Minimum Horizontal Number of rows that separate the image bands in the 0 - 10
Separation horizontal direction. The product uses this value to perform
format validation.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–29


SERVICE MANUAL

Item Description Range


[DICOM Info] Select [DICOM Info] to display the DICOM information N/A
indicated in this table.
Protocol Protocol used to communicate with the Destination. DICOM 3.0
Service Class The service class provided by the Destination. Print
Port Number The port number of the Destination that the product uses to 1024 - 32767; default 5040
establish a socket connection for sending and receiving
DICOM messages.
AE Title The Application Entry (AE) Title specifies the Destination application that the product must
communicate with for successful DICOM communications. The field width for this parameter is 1 - 16
alphanumeric characters. N_Event Reporting (NER) in the AE Title enables the reporting of
Destination status.
When a Destination is connected to a DICOM PRINT SPOOLER, Model 100, we recommend that
you customize the AE Title for a particular site:
• “ANY” or “NER_ANY” sends the image to the first matching gray scale or color PRINTER.
N_Event Reporting (NER).
• “Printer name” or “NER_printer name” sends the image to the specific printer when multiple
PRINTERS of the same type are connected to the DICOM PRINT SPOOLER, Model 100.
• For V_3.0.x and V_3.1.x MIMs sending to a DP SERVER which sends to a 2180 LASER
PRINTER, the AE Title can be modified with a forward slash (/) to indicate a BIN number. The
images will then be sent to that BIN.
• BIN designation is no longer required in the AE Title in V_3.2.x.
• DICOM devices that will allow a forward slash (/) and indicated BIN number at the end of an AE
Title can send to a DP SERVER and a 2180 LASER PRINTER. The images will be delivered to
that particular BIN.
• “2180” or “NER_2180” sends the image to the first installed PRINTER on the PIU that is a 2180
LASER PRINTER. Same for LASER PRINTER 1120 and 100 XLP.
• “2180/1” or “NER_2180/1” sends the documents to the first installed LASER PRINTER 2180 on a
V_6.02.00 DP SPOOLER and the films are placed in BIN #1.
• For A1.x version MIM, add “/C” as a suffix to a V_6.02.00 DICOM PRINT SPOOLER, Model 100.
Example: NER_2180/1/C

5–30 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Item Description Range


BIN number selection • BIN designation is no longer required in the AE Title in V_3.2.x.
• For V_3.2.x, the BIN number for the 2180 LASER PRINTER can be chosen at a MIM 50, MIM 100
or MIM 200 KEYPAD.
• For V_3.2.x the BIN number can be chosen at the DP SERVER or the MIM 200 as a print server
for the DICOM devices that are sending images.
[Response Message This feature is used for DICOM communication, and is configurable per site; it specifies the amount
Timer] of time to wait for a response after sending a message.
• If the PRINTER Destination is an MLP190 and it has 4 associations, set the timer to 400 seconds.
• If the PRINTER Destination is a LASER PRINTER using a DICOM PRINT SPOOLER, Model 100,
and it has more than 8 clients, set the timer to 400 seconds.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–31


SERVICE MANUAL

Important

• Do not modify any of the items in the table, “Destination Parameters” on Page 5–29 for a qualified destination unless directed to do so by the TSC.
• If an item is not checked in the “Supported Item” or “Media Info” windows, the customer will not be able to access that item:
– The KEYPAD of the MIM will not display an unsupported feature or function.
– The DP SERVER will not accept a request for an item unsupported by the destination.

Destination Parameters: Supported Items


Item Description Range
[Supported Items] Select [Supported Items] to display the supported features indicated in this table. N/A
Aspect Ratio Mix on Page Will the destination support mixed aspect ratios on the same page? Yes, No
Aspect Ratio Mix in Row Will the destination support mixed aspect ratios on the same row? Yes, No
Collation Will the destination support Collation? Yes, No
Color Will the destination support 3 color (RGB) printing? Yes, No
Color/Grayscale Same Page Will the destination support 3 color (RGB) printing on the same page? Yes, No
Common Text Will the destination support Common text band? The product uses this value to Yes, No
perform format validation.
Curve Shape Image Basis Will the destination support changing the Curve shape on a per image basis? Yes, No
Custom Formats Will the destination support Custom formats 101 and 102? The product uses this Yes, No
value to perform format validation.
Decimation Will the destination reduce image size to fit on the media? Yes, No
Edge Enhancement Will the destination support Edge Enhancement? Yes, No
Grayscale Will the destination support Grayscale printing? Yes, No
Image Size Mix in Std Fmt Will the destination support mixed image sizes on a standard formatted page: 2- Yes, No
up, 4 up, 6 up, 9 up, etc.
Image Size Mix in Row Will the destination support different size images in the same row? Yes, No
Media Bin Default Will the destination support multiple media sizes at the same time? Yes, No
Page Annotation Will the destination support page annotation? Often required for “Requested Yes, No
Image Size”.
Pivot Density Will the destination support pivot density? Yes, No
Print Quality Will the destination support different printing resolutions? Yes, No
Remote Image Deletion Will the destination support remote image deletion? Yes, No

5–32 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Item Description Range


Requested Image Size Will the destination support requested image size? Yes, No
Requested Size Scale Will the destination support requested image scale? Yes, No
Requested Size Mix on Page Will the destination support different requested image sizes on the same page? Yes, No
Requested Size Mix in Row Will the destination support different requested image sizes in the same row? Yes, No
Rotation Will the product support Full page rotation? The product uses this parameter to Yes, No
perform format validation.
Row Symmetric Formats Row symmetric formats supported by the Destination. Row symmetric formats Yes, No
have a line of symmetry only in the vertical direction. The product uses this
parameter to perform format validation.
Slide Format Slide format supported by the Destination. The product uses this parameter to Yes, No
perform format validation.
Super Slide Format Super slide format supported by the Destination. The product uses this parameter Yes, No
to perform format validation.
Trim Trim supported by the Destination. This parameter allows the KEYPAD to prevent Yes, No
the customer from selecting trim when it is not supported by the Destination.
Interpolation Methods Interpolation methods supported by the Destination. This parameter allows the Bilinear,
KEYPAD to prevent the customer from selecting an interpolation method that is Cubic Spline,
not supported by the Destination. Cubic
Convolution 2,
Cubic Con. 3,
Replication,
No Magnification

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–33


SERVICE MANUAL

Destination Parameters: Media Information


Item Description Range
[Media Info] Select [Media Info] to display the Media Information indicated in this table. N/A
Size Media sizes supported by the Destination. This is destination dependent. 35 x 43 cm
35 x 35 cm
11 x 14 in.
11 x 11 in.
10 x 12 in.
8.5 x 11 in.
8 x 10 in.
4 x 6 in.
A4
Types Media types supported by the Destination. Media types are selectable for each Any, Blue, Clear,
media size. “Any” indicates that the Destination will use the media type that Reflective
matches the media size selected. The selections “Reflective” and “Transparent” (Paper),
are valid for color printing. Transparent
(Film)select “OK”.
Maximum Columns Maximum number of printable pixels in the x-direction for a particular media size. 1 - 9999
Maximum columns are selectable for each media size. The product use this
parameter to perform format validation.
Maximum Rows Maximum number of printable pixels in the y-direction for a particular media size. 1 - 9999
Maximum rows are selectable for each media size with or without common text.
The product uses this parameter to perform format validation.

[17] Return to Page 5–28.

5–34 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Configuring the HARD DISK as a Destination for the MIM 100

Important
• This procedure is valid only for the MIM 100 with software less than V_3.0.
• In the “Installed Destination” window, if the Destination configurations of the
HARD DISK and the primary PRINTER do not match, delete the existing
Destination configuration of the HARD DISK and add a new Destination.
• The “Logical Name” of the HARD DISK must be entered as HARD DISK.
• If you delete the HARD DISK, the MIM 100 must be restarted for the “default
profile” to function. All other profiles that refer to the “HARD DISK” as a
Destination will not function.
• Do not save the configuration until the MIM is restarted.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Destination”.
[2] At the “Installed Destination” window, select “HARD DISK”.

Note
The screen at top left indicates V_2.0; The screen at bottom left indicates V_3.0.
[3] Select “Delete”.
[4] At the message “Are you sure to delete this destination?”, select “Yes”.

Important
The HARD DISK cannot be deleted if selected as current Destination for the MIM.
[5] If you cannot delete the HARD DISK, advance to the procedure “Deleting
the HARD DISK” on Page 5–36, then return to this procedure.
[6] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select “Add/Print/Qualified”.
[7] At the “Choose a New Destination” window, select the PRINTER type.
[8] Type: HARD DISK for the “Logical Name”.

Important
• Do not enter an IP Address.
• Memory for the HARD DISK and the primary PRINTER must match.
[9] Enter Memory in the “Memory” field.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–35


SERVICE MANUAL

[10] At the “Destination Parameters” window, select “Supported Items”.


[11] Check that parameters match for the HARD DISK and PRINTER.
[12] Select “OK” and advance to the next page.
[13] At the “Destination Parameters” window, select “Media Info”.
[14] Check that all parameters selected for the HARD DISK match the parameters of the primary PRINTER.
[15] Select “OK”.
[16] To store this configuration, select “Set”.
[17] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select “Cancel”.

Deleting the HARD DISK as the Current Destination of the MIM 100

Important
• Use this procedure for Versions less than 3.0 only.
• If the HARD DISK is selected as the current Destination, it cannot be deleted through the “Installed Destination” window in the “MIM Service Application”. Changes
must first be made through the MIM KEYPAD.
[1] At the “Acquisition” screen, press [Manage Profiles].
[2] At the “Manage Profiles” screen, press [Create Profile].
[3] Type: <name> and press [Enter].
[4] In the “Profile/Imaging Options” screen, press [Change Destination].
[5] In the “Profile /Change Destination” screen, highlight HARD DISK in the “Deliver To” window and press [Remove Destination].
[6] In the “Profile/Change Destination” screen, highlight a Destination in the “Destination Options” window other than HARD DISK and press [Add Destination].
[7] In the “Profile/Change Destination” screen, press [Return].
[8] In the “Profile/Imaging Options” screen, press [Return].
[9] In the “Save Configuration” screen, press [Accept Changes].
[10] In the “Manage Profiles” screen, press [Select Profile].
[11] Press [Return].

5–36 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Adding a Storage Device for the MIM 100 and MIM 200 with Touchscreen Keypad

Important

• Before you enter the Destination Parameters, verify the information at the
Destination.
• Verify that the Hosts file of the Destination contains the IP Address and
Logical Name of the MIM.
• If this is the first Storage Destination, see “Enabling Software Licenses” on
Page 13–4.
• In the “Destination Parameters” window, press [Tab] on the LAPTOP to
advance to the next entry.
• For more information about the Destination Parameters, see the table on
Page 5–29.
• These screen shots are for V_3.2.x.
[1] At the “Service Application” window, select “Configure/Destination”.
[2] At the “Installation Destination” window, select “Add/Store/Unqualified or
Qualified”.
[3] At the “Destination Parameters” window, enter:
a. “Logical Name”
b. “IP Address”
[4] Select “DICOM Info.”

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–37


SERVICE MANUAL

[5] In the “DICOM Information” window, enter the correct information:


• Port Number
• AE Title
• Response Message
[6] Select “OK”.
[7] To store this configuration, select “Set”.
[8] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select “Cancel”.

5–38 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

Configuring the HIS/RIS GATEWAY


Configuring the HIS/RIS Gateway for the MIM 100 and MIM 200 with Touchscreen Keypad

Important
Each channel must be configured. To configure the Modality information the first
time, do all remaining steps. If the Modality information has previously been
configured, advance to Step 8.
[1] At the “Service Application” window, select “Configure” / “Input” / “Direct
Connect”.
[2] At the “Configuration” window, select “Modality Info” / “Modify”.
[3] When the COMPUTER prompts you “Are you sure?”, select “OK”. The
LAPTOP displays the “Modality Info”.
[4] At the “Type” entry line, select the down arrow and highlight a Modality from
the list.

Note
The “Type” parameter enables different preferences and tonescaling on some
WORKSTATIONS. “Type” sets up an algorithm for the type of modality (for
example, MR for Magnetic Resonance). The rest of the fields can be any
information that is meaningful to you and the site. Once you set it up, the modality
information will be used for HIS/RIS and storage class destinations.
[5] Enter any additional information in other fields.
[6] At the “Modality Info” screen, select “OK”.
[7] At the “Configuration” window, select “Close.”

Note
You need to check the storage Destination connection by executing a ping.
[8] At the “Service Application” window, select “Diagnostics/Network”.
[9] At the “Network Diagnostics” window, select “Run”.
[10] At the “Input IP Address” window, enter the “IP Address” of storage device.
[11] Select “OK”.
[12] At the “Network Diagnostics” window, select “Cancel”.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–39


SERVICE MANUAL

Important
• It is necessary to configure the HIS/RIS Gateway for the MIM to successfully query the “Patient Worklist” at the KEYPAD.
• When the KEYPAD of the MIM displays either “Study Info” or the “Patient List” screen, the MIM application queries the HIS/RIS GATEWAY every 2 minutes and
updates the new information in the “Patient List” screen.
• The KEYPAD displays records in the “Patient List” for the current day only.
[13] At “MIM Service Application”, select “Configure’/’HIS/RIS Gateway”.
[14] At “HIS/RIS Gateway Configuration”, enter the correct values:.

HIS/RIS GATEWAY Mitra GATEWAY


IP Address Site Specific
AE Title BROKER
Port Number 3320
[15] Select “Set”.

Adding the “Station Name” at the KEYPAD


[1] Using the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD, select:
(a) “Main Menu”
(b) “Service”
(c) “More Options”
(d) “HIS/RIS Configuration”
(e) Add Station Name
[2] Using either the KEYPAD or the MINI-KEYBOARD, type the name of the station and then press [Enter].
[3] Select “Return” three times.
[4] Select “Acquisition.”

Checking the HIS/RIS Connection

Important
If the HIS/RIS connection is not functioning, an error message “WORKLIST CONN. TIMEOUT” displays on the “Study Info” MIM KEYPAD screen. See “Troubleshooting
the HIS/RIS Gateway Connection.”
[1] At the MIM KEYPAD “Main Menu” screen, press [Acquisition], then [Study Info].

5–40 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring Service Tracking Information, Network, Destination, and HIS/RIS Gateway

[2] At the “Study Info” screen, press [Patient List].


[3] Check with the Hospital Administrator that proper entries are being entered for today’s date.

Note
If patient information exists, it appears in the “Patient Info” box.
[4] If necessary, see Page 2–22 to determine what procedure you must advance to.

Troubleshooting the HIS/RIS Gateway Connection


[1] Check that you can ping using the MIM Service Application to the IP Address of the HIS/RIS GATEWAY.
[2] Check that the Station Name is entered properly. The Station Name is used by the MIM to query the HIS/RIS GATEWAY for Patient Worklist Records.
[3] Check with the Hospital Administrator that Patient Records are entered at the HIS/RIS GATEWAY for today’s date.
[4] Temporarily change the Station Name on MIM to “*”. The “*” is a Wildcard providing all Patient Records entered in HIS/RIS for today’s date.

Disabling the HIS/RIS GATEWAY


Note
This procedure allows you to disable the MIM from querying the HIS/RIS Gateway every 2 minutes at the MIM KEYPAD “Study Info” or “Patient List” screen.
[1] At the “Service Application” window, select “Configure’/‘HIS/RIS Gateway”.
[2] Select “Reset”. The IP Address is cleared.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 5–41


SERVICE MANUAL

Configuring the Input


Configuring the Input of the Product
Input Package Product Section-Page Important
VIDEO 60 BOARD MIM 50 and MIM 200 6–1 How you configure the product depends on which Input Package you will be
SPOOLER/Video, RGB and 6–1 installing. Advance to the section for the Input Package that you will install. See
MIM 200 “Configuring the Input of the Product” on Page 5–42.
VIDEO 150 BOARD MIM 100 7–1
Digital Input MIM or SPOOLER/Digital 8–1
Network Input DICOM PRINT SERVER 9–2
SPOOLER/DICOM MIM 200

5–42 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Section 6: Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Introduction

Important
Use this Section to configure the VIDEO 60 BOARD for the MIM 50, MIM 200 or the SPOOLER/Video. Before you begin installation, read the following to help you
prepare for correct configuration, then advance to Page 6–2:
• Will the primary control of the equipment be the KEYPAD or the Autofilming Link?
• Is the equipment Pre-staged?
– Pre-staged indicates that the equipment was shipped with the Modality parameters already installed and tested.
– The Pre-staged MIM 50 or MIM 200 can be either Qualified or Unqualified.
• Will you connect the MIM 50, MIM 200 or SPOOLER to a Qualified or Unqualified Modality?
– A Qualified Input indicates that the Modality has been field tested with correct parameters. The database in the Service Software for the MIM might also include
this Modality in the Qualified list.
– An Unqualified Input indicates that the Modality has not been field tested.
• Check that the operator can provide you with a clinical image to evaluate image quality after you finish configuring the Input. The image must contain:
– Grayscale including the brightest and darkest values (0 to 255 A/D Counts)
– White text on black background, or black text on white background
– Sharp transitions and vertical lines

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Configuring the Input Parameters

Important
• Check that the correct board and channel number are selected before
proceeding.
• See the Modality Spec Sheet provided with the MIM to determine correct
parameters. An example of the Spec Sheet is indicated on Page 22–1.
[1] At “MIM Service Application”, select “Configure” / “Input” / “Direct Connect”.
Is the Input configured for the parameters of the Modality?
• No: Do all steps below.
• Yes: Do Step 1 and then do Steps 7 through 9 only.

Note
A VIDEO 60 BOARD can accommodate 2 monochrome inputs. If 2 RGB inputs
are required, then 2 VIDEO BOARDS are required.
[2] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” menu, select “Add” / “Video” /
“Qualified” / “Video 60”. Scroll down to select the correct Modality.
[3] In the “Board/Channel” field of the “Direct Connect Input Parameters”
window, select a Video channel or RGB.
[4] Enter a Logical Name, using the name of the Board that’s meaningful for the
site.
[5] Click OK.
[6] In the “Primary Control” field, select the “Keypad Type” and the “Com Port”.

Note
The available Com Ports starting from the lowest will display.
[7] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, select “Modify”.

Note
To view the configuration only, select “View”.
[8] At the message “Executing this communication will take the system off-line.
Are you sure?” select [OK]. Use the Table on Page 6–4 to check that the
information is correct. If you do not change data, select [Cancel]. If you do,
select [OK].
[9] Use the table, “Advancing the Correct Procedure for the VIDEO 60 BOARD”

6–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

on Page 6–3 to advance to the correct procedure:


Advancing to the Correct Procedure for the VIDEO 60 BOARD
Primary
Control Type Product Pre-Staged Page
Autofilming MIM 50, MIM 200 or SPOOLER/ N/A 6–5
Video
Keypad MIM 50 or MIM 200 Yes 6–12
No 6–20
MIM 200, SPOOLER/Video, or Yes 6–16
RGB No 6–30

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–3


SERVICE MANUAL

Input Parameters
Input Parameter Description Range
Board INTERFACE BOARD on the PCI BUS. Video 60 Board (monochrome) or (RGB) prior to V_3.2
Video 60 Board, RGB (Color) with V_3.2
Video 60 Board, ch 1 monochrome with V_3.2
Video 60 Board, ch 2 monochrome with V_3.2
Video 60 Board, ch 3 monochrome with V_3.2
Channel Number Number of the channel of the INTERFACE BOARD. Channel 1, 2, or 3
Logical Name Name of the BOARD receiving the input. 1 - 5 alphanumeric characters
Examples: MRI 1 or CTRM 1
Database Name Name of the modality. Viewable only. 1 - 30 alphanumeric characters
Primary Control Type Primary method the customer uses to control MIM. KEYPAD - Touchscreen or Conventional
Autofilming: Hitachi, KCL, P831, M952, Siemens (DASM, FSPOT,
SPCI), Toshiba, YMS
Primary Control Com Port Port for the KEYPAD or the serial control CABLE connection Keypad: COM 5 for Single Input MIM 50, 100 and DP Server. For
MIM 200 and Multiple Input MIM 50 it is COM 5, 7, or 9.
Autofilming RS232 (MIM 100 only): COM 2
Autofilming RS422: COM 4 for MIM 100NR and MIM 50. For MIM
200 it is COM 4, 6, or 8.
12 VDC Power Power for external FIBER OPTIC TRANSCEIVER (Hirschmann Keypad: OFF
(MIM 100 with Relay CONNECTOR) for RS232 PORT. Autofilming only. Autofilming: On, Off
Board only)
Auxiliary Control Keypad Indicates that the KEYPAD is or is not enabled for auxiliary control Keypad: Off
when autofilming is the primary control. Autofilming: On
Important: For the MIM with autofilming, “Auxiliary Control” is always
On.
Auxiliary Control Com Port The Com Port for the KEYPAD when it is used as auxiliary control. If the Primary Control is
If the KEYPAD is the Primary Control, then the “Auxiliary Control Autofilming: COM 5 for MIM 100 and MIM 50. For MIM 200 it is 5, 7,
Com Port” is not user changeable. or 9 -- whichever one is available.
Keypad: Not available.
Aspect Ratio: Horizontal Horizontal component of pixel aspect ratio. The software 1 - 255
automatically determines this ratio. Aspect ratios not equal to 1:1
correct for non-square pixels.

6–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Input Parameter Description Range


Aspect Ratio: Vertical Vertical component of pixel aspect ratio. The software 1 - 255
automatically determines this ratio. Aspect ratios not equal to 1:1
correct for non-square pixels.
Page Preallocation When enabled, this feature ensures that sufficient memory is On, Off
available on the HARD DISK to prevent a “Buffer Full” condition
while MIM stores a page.

Note
To continue configuring the input parameters, return to Page 6–2.

Configuring the MIM for the Autofilming Mode

Important
• For autofilming, an RS232 or RS422 CABLE must be connected between the
Modality and the MIM.
• The MIM 50, MIM 100 with no Relay Board, MIM 200 and SPOOLER use
only RS422.
• For autofilming connections that require RS232, install the CONVERTER KIT
8B8186 to convert the RS232 signal to RS422.
• Use the “Modality Spec. Sheet” provided with the MIM to determine correct
parameters. See the Table on Page 6–4 for an example of the “Modality
Spec. Sheet.”
• The MIM 100 with a Relay Board does support RS232.
[1] At the “Configuration” window, select “Autofilming” / “Modify”.
[2] When the COMPUTER prompts you “Are you sure?” select “OK”. The
“Autofilming” window displays.
[3] At the window for the type of autofilming at the site, enter the correct
information. See the Tables on Page 6–7 and Page 6–7.
[4] If you did not change information, select “Cancel”. If you changed
information, select [Set].

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–5


SERVICE MANUAL

Important
After changing the setup information, you must click [SET] or the changes will be
lost.
[5] See the Table on Page 2–22 to determine the next step.

6–6 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Default Values for Autofilming Link Parameters


Parameter Autofilming Link
Hitachi KCL P831 M952 Siemens Toshiba YMS
SPCI/
FSPOT DASM
Port ID -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Driver Type RS422 RS422 RS422 RS422 RS232* RS232* RS422 RS422
Baud Rate 4800 9600 1200 1200 2400 4800 9600 1200
Data Length 8 8 8 8 7 8 7 8
Stop Bits 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2
Parity even none even even odd even even odd
Store Key active active active active -- -- active active
ACK Wait Timer 3 5 6 6 2 2 1 --
Receive Message Timer -- 5 6 6 -- -- 1 --
Start Timer -- 2 -- -- 1 1 -- --
EOT Wait Timer -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 --
Switch Mode -- Keypad -- -- -- -- Keypad --
Switch Handling -- Not -- -- -- -- -- --
Allowed
Report Alarms -- -- On -- -- -- -- --
Automatic Film Type -- -- -- -- Off Off -- --
Selection
DTR Connection -- -- -- -- -- -- On --
Establishment
Default Horizontal Frames -- -- -- -- -- -- 3 --
Default Vertical Frames -- -- -- -- -- -- 4 --

Note
*Supported by the MIM 100 only. All other models must have RS232 converted to RS422. See the “Important” at the top of Page 6–5.

Autofilming Parameters for the MIM: Parameters indicated by * do not apply to all types of autofilming
Item Description Range
Port Id SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT MIM 100: COM2, COM4
MIM 50, 100NR: COM4

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–7


SERVICE MANUAL

Item Description Range


Driver Type Driver protocol of the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT MIM 100: RS232, RS422
MIM 50, 100NR: RS422
Baud Rate Baud Rate of the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
Data Length Number of bits for serial communications 7, 8
Stop Bits Number of stop bits for serial communications 1, 2
Parity Setting of parity for SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT None, even, odd
Store Key* Determines if [Store] on the KEYPAD is active when the system uses auxiliary control Active, Inactive
ACK Wait Timer* Acknowledgment wait timer. The time in seconds that the MIM will wait after it sends a 1 - 999
message until the Imaging Device acknowledges that it received the message.
Receive Message Timer* Specifies the amount of time in seconds allowed to receive an entire message. 1 - 999
Start Timer* Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the MIM waits for the Imaging Device to reply to 1 - 999
a handshake character.
EOT Wait Timer* Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the MIM waits to receive an End of 1- 999
Transmission (EOT) character from the Imaging Device.
Switch Mode* Allows you to designate printing films using either the Console of the Imaging Device (Host) Keypad, Host
or the Auxiliary KEYPAD.
Switch Handling* The process used to handle stored images when filming is switched between the Host and Not Allowed
the Auxiliary KEYPAD.
Report Alarms* Flag that indicates if the MIM should report to the modality alarm conditions associated with On, Off
the PRINTER.
Automatic Film Type Selection* Flag that indicates if the SUPPLY MAGAZINE in the LASER PRINTER must be used to On, Off
automatically select the film size and film base.
DTR Connection Specifies the amount of time in seconds the MIM must wait for the Imaging Device to 1 - 999
Establishment* respond to a handshake character.
Default Horizontal Frames* The number of horizontal frames in page format that the MIM defaults to. 1-9
Default Vertical Frames* The number of vertical frames in page format that the MIM defaults to. 1-9

6–8 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Adjusting the Image Quality


Optimum image quality can be achieved from the MIM products by adjusting the video signal and parameters. In a video environment, the process begins with a good
video signal. This signal must then be adjusted in the MIM. Check that you have done the following:
• Use the correct parameters to capture the video signal for digitization.
• Check that the signal is centered correctly - both vertically and horizontally.
• Set the gain and offset correctly to obtain the correct black and white values. See “Defining Black and White Values (Using the Advanced Leveling Feature)” on
Page 6–10.
• The pixel clock must be correctly timed with the data signal pixels.
The Video 60 and Video 150 boards have an auto setup feature that will accomplish this setup when the correct video signal is provided. When the algorithm has
completed, check the image for the correct values for gain and offset. For optimum quality in monochrome images, the black value should be 2 ±2 and the white value
should be 253 ±2. If the adjustment is for color images, these values should be 1 -1/+0 (0 or 1) for black and 254 +1/-0 (254 or 255) for white. Check these values in
the red, green and blue color plane for the correct values.
Starting in V_3.2 software, the Video 60 board has a new feature, called “advanced leveling.” The user can now choose a spot which will be used to define black and
white values, instead of the computer using the entire image to find a portion that it calls black and white. When a modality provides a computer-generated grayscale,
the black and white points can be selected from it. This will provide a known black and white point for the computer to use to adjust gain and offset. After this algorithm
runs, you should check the images for the proper gain and offset values. This feature can be especially useful for Ultrasound images and can be used for images from
all modalities. See “Defining Black and White Values (Using the Advanced Leveling Feature)” on Page 6–10.
• Print a page of images to check that the timing is correct.
• Check that transitions from black to white are sharp and clear.
• Print a curve series, contrast series, or color print matching series.
In versions of software prior to V_3.2, only the curve series or the color print matching series could be run. The curve series is used for the 2180, 1120, and 190 Laser
Printers. Different contrast settings will produce a different looking image when printing the curve series. There are 11 possible contrast settings that could be used.
For each contrast setting, there are 6 curve shape prints to choose from.
The contrast series is used for all DryView printers and any printers connected to the 9410. The correct TFT/ULUT (Transfer Function Table/Universal Look Up Table)
should be selected before printing this contrast series. There are 16 images to choose from in this series. The 160 Laser Imager will require the use of this contrast
series to adjust image quality.
The color print matching series is used for the 1200 and 3600 Distributed Medical Imagers. There are 11 possible contrast settings that can be used, and there are 6
color print matching prints to choose from. Regardless of which series is used, the goal is to match the images to the modality monitor.
The curve shape and the contrast settings are set in different ways, depending on the modality. Some auto filming links will send the values to use, and some will use
the default settings in the MIM.
The DP SERVER is a DICOM SCP (Service Class Provider). The contrast setting could be sent in the DICOM information, but there are defaults in the DP SERVER
that are used in case these values are not sent. In versions prior to V_3.2 there was only one default value to be used by all SCUs (Service Class Users) for printing.
Starting in V_3.2, the default values for each SCU can be set at the DP SERVER.
Starting with V_3.2, the MIM SCU now sends the modality type, body part, and image tone adjustment information to the printer and storage destinations. The modality
type can be configured via the MIM Service Application and the body part (if series is enabled) can be selected at the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD. The modality type

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–9


SERVICE MANUAL

and body part information is useful when sending to storage destinations to enable hanging protocols and features of certain workstations. Modality type is useful when
sending to networked DMI print destinations to select image processing techniques.

Defining Black and White Values (Using the Advanced Leveling Feature)
Note
This procedure allows the Field Engineer to define black and white values for pre-
staged and not-prestaged systems. This procedure is optional, and can be done
as needed to define black and white values.
[1] At the “Video Board Setup” window, select “Acquire”.
[2] In the “Uncompressed Region Of Interest” window, hold and drag the left
mouse button to select a region of interest, including a grayscale area. The
“Uncompressed Region of Interest” screen is displayed.
[3] Select a Region of Interest (ROI) to include grayscale:
(a) Use the MOUSE to click-and-drag a rectangle around an ROI: You
must drag the MOUSE from the top-left position of the ROI to the
bottom-right position of the ROI.
(b) Release the MOUSE click. The uncompressed image displays.
[4] Move the cursor to the blackest point of the screen. Hold the “b” key and
press the right MOUSE button. The x and y coordinate values will be
entered in the Black area of the “Advanced Leveling” window.
[5] Move the cursor to the whitest point of the screen. Hold the “w” key and
press the right MOUSE button. The x and y coordinate values will be
entered in the White area of the “Advanced Leveling” window.

6–10 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

[6] In the “Advanced Leveling” window, select “Perform Leveling”.


[7] Close the Region Of Interest box.
[8] In the “Video Board Setup” window, select “Set Parameters”.
[9] Select “Acquire”.
[10] Select a Region of Interest (ROI) to check the gain and offset values:
(a) Use the MOUSE to click-and-drag a rectangle around an ROI: You
must drag the MOUSE from the top-left position of the ROI to the
bottom-right position of the ROI.
(b) Release the MOUSE click. The uncompressed image displays.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–11


SERVICE MANUAL

Using [Auto Setup] to Configure the VIDEO 60 BOARD


Using [Auto Setup] to Configure the MIM 50 and MIM 200/VIDEO 60 BOARD

Important
• The MIM 50 or MIM 200 must be energized for at least 5 minutes before you
select “Auto Setup”. The VIDEO BOARD requires about 5 minutes to
stabilize.
• Check that the operator can provide a test pattern from the Modality, such as
a SMPTE or Grayscale pattern. If test pattern is not available, choose the
best clinical image that meets the following requirements:
– Grayscale with brightest and darkest values (0 to 255 A/D Counts)
– White text on black background or black text on white background
– Sharp transitions and vertical lines
[1] At “MIM Service Application”, select [Configure] / “Input”/ “Direct Connect”.

Important
A Modality must already be set up in the configuration before you do Step 2.
Check that the Modality you want to configure is highlighted in the Configuration
window.
[2] At the “Configuration” window, select “Acquisition” / “Modify”.
[3] At the “Modify Parameters” window, select “OK”.

Note
See the Table on Page 6–23 for descriptions of the buttons and choices in the
“Video Board Setup” window.
[4] At the “Video Board Setup” window, select [Auto Setup].

6–12 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Important
Wait about 1 minute while the “Video Board Setup” window displays the
messages indicated in the screen below. These messages might occur more
than once during the process. Also, the Offset and Gain messages might
interchange. If Autosetup does not finish, see Help Files “Autosetup Failures”.
Auto Offset: Decreasing coarse offset (xx)
Auto Gain: Increasing coarse gain (xx)
Auto Pixel Clock: Computing derivatives
(xx)
Auto Horizontal: Finding right black
border
Auto Vertical: Finding top black border

[5] Select “Set Parameters”.


[6] At the “Video Board Setup”, select “Acquire” to evaluate the image.
[7] Select a Region of Interest (ROI) and display the uncompressed ROI image:
(a) Use the MOUSE to click-and-drag a rectangle around an ROI: You
must drag the MOUSE from the top-left position of the ROI to the
bottom-right position of the ROI.
(b) Release the MOUSE click. The uncompressed image displays.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–13


SERVICE MANUAL

Important
• To determine pixel values, observe the “Pixel Value” window while you move the cursor over the image.
• You might have to execute several acquires to completely evaluate the quality of the image.
• To create a histogram, do Step 7 again within the existing uncompressed image.
• Beginning with Application Software V_3.0 of the VIDEO 60 BOARD, you can right click the MOUSE to zoom on a specific area of the ROI.
• To save the ROI, select “Save ROI”.
[8] Observe that the test image indicates the following properties for good image quality:
• Correct Gain and Offset:
Brightest white: Pixel value of 253 + 2 counts
Darkest Black: Pixel Value of 2 + 2 counts
Visible 5% and 95% grayscale values if you display the SMPTE pattern.
• Centered horizontally and vertically
• Correct Clock Timing: No visible pixel shift or line shift
• Straight, undistorted horizontal and vertical lines
• Clear text. Ask the operator to type more text if necessary.
• Sharp transitions between maximum and minimum grayscale values
Reminder: Need some more info here.

6–14 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

[9] Close the Uncompressed ROI box.


[10] If you must modify the video parameters:
• See “Troubleshooting Guide for the Acquired Image” on Page 6–15
• See “Fields and [Buttons] in the Video Gain and Offset Parameters
Window” on Page 6–26 for a description of the “Gain and Offset
Parameters” menu.
[11] Select the necessary configuration button, for example “Auto Gain” and
“Auto Offset”.
[12] Enter the changes and select “Done”.
[13] At the “Video Board Setup” window, select “Set Parameters”.
[14] Do Steps 6 through 12 until you are satisfied with the test image.
[15] Close the test image.
[16] To store the configuration window, select “Set Parameters”.
[17] At the “Video Board Setup” window, select “Done”.
[18] Store and print 2 or more clinical images with either the KEYPAD or the
Autofilming link.
[19] After you store the image, close the Direct Connect Input Configuration
window.
[20] See “Completing the Installation on Page 2–22 to determine the next step.

Troubleshooting Guide for the Acquired Image


Malfunction Remedy
Maximum grayscale counts not 253 + 2 counts. In the “Video Gain and Offset Parameters” window, adjust the values for “Fine Gain” and “Fine Offset”. Adjust
Minimum grayscale counts not 2 + 2 counts. these values 10 steps at a time. Increasing the “Gain” will cause the white pixel counts to increase without
affecting the black pixels. Increasing the “Offset” will cause the white and black pixel counts to increase.
Pixel shift or line shift in the vertical lines or in the Check that the Modality MONITOR displays the correct test image. Execute [Auto Setup] again. Ask the operator
text of the image. to add more text to the image if you do not have sufficient text to evaluate.
The acquired image does not include all of the In the “Video Vertical Parameters” window, adjust the values for the “Images Lines / Frame”. In the “Video
image information that the modality monitor Horizontal Parameters” window, adjust the values for the “Image Pixels / Line”. Increasing these values will
displays. increase the area of the image that the VIDEO BOARD requires.
Blurred text. In the “Video Vertical Parameters” window, swap fields.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–15


SERVICE MANUAL

Using [Auto Setup] to Configure the MIM 200 or SPOOLER/VIDEO 60 BOARD, RGB

Important
• The SPOOLER must be energized for at least 5 minutes before you select
“Auto Setup”. The VIDEO BOARD requires about 5 minutes to stabilize.
• Check that the operator can provide a test pattern from the Modality, such as
a SMPTE or Grayscale pattern. If test pattern is not available, choose the
best clinical image that meets the following requirements:
– Grayscale with brightest and darkest values (0 to 255 A/D Counts)
– White text on black background or black text on white background
– Sharp transitions and vertical lines
[1] At “Service Application”, select [Configure] / “Input”/ “Direct Connect”.

Important
A Modality must already be set up in the configuration before you do Step 2.
[2] At the “Configuration” window, select “Acquisition” / “Modify”.
[3] At the “Modify Parameters” window, select “OK”.

Note
See “Fields and [Buttons] in the Video Board Setup Windows on Page 6–23 for
a description of the parameters in the “Video Board Setup”.
[4] At the “Video Board Setup” window, select [Auto Setup].

6–16 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Important
Wait about 1 minute while the “Video Board Setup” window displays the
messages indicated in the screen below. These messages might occur more
than once during the process. Also, the Offset and Gain messages might
interchange. If Autosetup does not finish, see Help Files “Autosetup Failures”.
Auto Offset: Decreasing coarse offset (xx)
Auto Gain: Increasing coarse gain (xx)
Auto Pixel Clock: Computing derivatives
(xx)
Auto Horizontal: Finding right black
border
Auto Vertical: Finding top black border

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–17


SERVICE MANUAL

[5] Select “Set Parameters”.


[6] At the “Video Board Setup”, select “Acquire” to evaluate the image.
[7] Select a Region of Interest (ROI) and display the uncompressed ROI image:
(a) Use the MOUSE to click-and-drag a rectangle around an ROI: You
must drag the MOUSE from the top-left position of the ROI to the
bottom-right position of the ROI.
(b) Release the MOUSE click. The uncompressed image displays.

Important
In the following steps, observe each of the Red, Green, and Blue pixels.
• To determine pixel values, observe the “Pixel Value” window while you move
the cursor over the image.
• You might have to execute several acquires to completely evaluate the
quality of the image.
• To create a histogram, do Step 7 again in the existing uncompressed image.
• Beginning with Application Software V_3.0 of the VIDEO 60 BOARD, you can
right click the MOUSE to zoom on a specific area of the ROI.
• To save the ROI, select “Save ROI”.
[8] Observe that the test image indicates the following properties for good
image quality:
• Correct Gain and Offset:
Brightest white: Pixel values of 253 ±2 counts for RGB
Darkest Black: Pixel values of 2 ±2 counts for RGB
Visible 5% and 95% grayscale values if you display the SMPTE
pattern.
• Centered horizontally and vertically
• Correct Clock Timing: No visible pixel shift or line shift
• Straight, undistorted horizontal and vertical lines
• Clear text. Ask the operator to type more text if necessary.
• Sharp transitions between maximum and minimum grayscale values

6–18 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

[9] If you must modify the video parameters see:


• “Troubleshooting Guide for the Acquired Image on Page 6–15
• “Fields and [Buttons] in the Video Gain and Offset Parameters Window”
on Page 6–26 for a description of the “Gain and Offset Parameters”
menu
[10] Select the necessary configuration button, for example “Auto Gain” and
“Auto Offset”.
[11] Enter the changes and select “Done”.
[12] At the “Video Board Setup” window, select “Set Parameters”.
[13] Do Steps 6 through 12 until you are satisfied with the test image.
[14] Close the test image.
[15] To store the configuration window, select “Set Parameters”.
[16] At the “Configuration” window, select “Done”.
[17] Store and print 2 or more clinical images.
[18] See “Completing the Installation” on Page 2–22 to determine the next step.

Troubleshooting Guide for the Acquired Image


Malfunction Remedy
The maximum grayscale counts are not 253 ±2 In the “Video Gain and Offset Parameters” window, adjust the values of each color separately for “Fine Gain” and
counts. “Fine Offset”. Adjust these values 10 steps at a time. Increasing the “Gain” will cause the white pixel counts to
The minimum grayscale counts are not 2 ±2 increase without affecting the black pixels. Increasing the “Offset” will cause the white and black pixel counts to
counts. increase.
Pixel shift or line shift in the vertical lines or in the Check that the Modality MONITOR displays the correct test image. Execute [Auto Setup] again. Ask the operator
text of the image. to add more text to the image if you do not have sufficient text to evaluate.
The acquired image does not include all of the In the “Video Vertical Parameters” window, adjust the values for the “Images Lines / Frame”. In the “Video
image information that the modality monitor Horizontal Parameters” window, adjust the values for the “Image Pixels / Line”. Increasing these values will
displays. increase the area of the image that the VIDEO BOARD requires.
Blurred text. In the “Video Vertical Parameters” window, swap fields.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–19


SERVICE MANUAL

Configuring the VIDEO 60 BOARD that is Not Pre-Staged


Configuring the MIM 50 or MIM 200/VIDEO 60 BOARD

Important
• Before you can add a new Input, you must delete the existing Input from the
“Configuration” menu. The MIM 200 and MIM 50 can be multiple input
devices. Check to be sure you are deleting the correct device.
• See Tables on Pages 6–23 through 6–28 for descriptions of the parameters
that you will enter in this procedure.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure” / “Input” /
“Direct Connect”.

Note
A shortcut to open the “Configuration” window is to select the third [Hot Key] on
the Tool Bar.
[2] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, if an Input had
previously been set up, highlight the correct Input and then select [Delete].
[3] At the message, “Executing this command will delete the input from the
system. Are you sure?” select “Yes”. The KEYPAD goes off-line.
[4] From the “Configuration” window, select “Add” / “Video” and the correct
selection from the following choices:
• “Qualified Video 60”
• “Unqualified Video 60

6–20 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

[5] Do either (a) or (b):


(a) “Qualified Video 60”:
• Highlight the name of the Modality and select “OK” in the
“Qualified Video 60 Modalities” window to display the “Direct
Connect Input Parameters” menu.
• Select Board and Channel on RGB.
• Type a name in the Logical Name field that will help you
remember the Board/Channel name.
• In the “Primary Control” panel, use the drop down menus to make
one of the following selections:
– “Keypad Type” and “Com Port” for Keypad Control
– “Autofilming Type” and “Com Port” for Autofilming
(b) “Unqualified Video 60”: In the “Video Board Setup” window, enter the
correct input parameter information from the Modality Worksheet.

Note
To see the “Video Board Setup” window, see Page 6–20.
• Use Tables on Pages 6–33 through 6–39 and the “Modality Spec Sheet” on
Page 22–1 for input information and guidelines.
[6] Select [Set Parameters] from the “Video Board Setup” window.
[7] To configure the MIM 50 or MIM 200/Video, see “Using [Auto Setup] to
Configure the MIM 200 or SPOOLER/VIDEO 60 BOARD” on Page 6–16.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–21


SERVICE MANUAL

Direct Connect Input Parameters


Input Parameter Description Range
Board / Channel INTERFACE BOARD on the PCI BUS / the active channel Video Board 1/Channel 1, 2, or 3 and RGB

Logical Name Name of the BOARD receiving the input. 1 - 5 alphanumeric


Database Name of the modality. View only. 1 - 30 alphanumeric
Primary Control Type Primary method the customer uses to control MIM. KEYPAD - Touchscreen or Conventional
Autofilming: Hitachi, KCL, P831, M952, Siemens
(DASM, FSPOT, SPCI), Toshiba, YMS
Primary Control Com Port for the KEYPAD or the serial control CABLE connection Keypad: COM 5 for Single Input MIM 50, 100 and DP
Port Server. For MIM 200 and Multiple Input MIM 50 it is
COM 5, 7, or 9.
Autofilming RS232 (MIM 100 only): COM 2
Autofilming RS422: COM 4 for MIM 100NR and MIM
50. For MIM 200 it is COM 4, 6, or 8.
Auxiliary Control The field “Keypad” is automatically checked (in versions prior to V3.x) when you If Primary Control is
Keypad select autofilming as the Primary Control. The type of Keypad is selectable (in • Autofilming: 4
version 3.x and higher) depending on the MIM. • Keypad:
Auxiliary Control Com The Com Port for the KEYPAD when it is used as auxiliary control. If the KEYPAD If the Primary Control is
Port is the Primary Control, then the “Auxiliary Control Com Port” is not user • Autofilming: COM 4, 6, or 8 for MIM 200 and COM 4
changeable. for MIM 50
• Keypad: 5, 7, or 9 for MIM 200 and COM 5 for MIM
50
Aspect Ratio: Horizontal component of pixel aspect ratio. The software automatically determines 1 - 255
Horizontal this ratio. When the aspect ratio is not 1:1, the software corrects for non-square
pixels.
Aspect Ratio: Vertical Vertical component of pixel aspect ratio. The software automatically determines 1 - 255
this ratio. When the aspect ratio is not 1:1, the software corrects for non-square
pixels.
Page Pre-allocation When enabled, this feature ensures that sufficient memory is available on the On, Off
HARD DISK to prevent a “Buffer Full” condition while the MIM stores a page.

6–22 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Video Board Setup” Windows


Parameter Description Range
Video Input Channel The channel number 1,2,3,
RGB
[Config] Press to enter values for 5 parameters:
[Horizontal Parameters] See Page 6–24.
[Vertical Parameters] See Page 6–25.
[Gain and Offset] See Page 6–26.
[Sync Parameters] See Page 6–27.
[Pixel Clock Parameters] See Page 6–28.
[Auto Setup] Automatically adjusts the values for
certain parameters.
[Acquire] from “Current Automatically captures and displays a test
Settings” or “Last Saved” image.
Ignore Lock Detect on When enabled, the MIM 50 or MIM 200 Not
Acquire will capture an image even if an error Enabled
Do not enable this mode. occurs. The software will not compute the
“Lock Detect Count”.
Ignore Signal Detect on The MIM 50 or MIM 200 or SPOOLER/ Yes, No
Acquire Video will capture an image even if a
signal is not detected.
Frame Averaging This feature reduces the signal noise in Yes, No
the image. When you select “Frame default:
Averaging,” a window opens to the right of Off
the field, allowing you to enter the number
(2-4) of frames for which you need to
calculate the average.
Terminate Video Input Provides 75 Ohms at video input. Without Yes, No
See “RS-232/RS-422 this termination the image will indicate
CONVERTER” on ringing. Modalities with high pixel clock
Page 17–16. frequency will be affected most.
Terminate Ext CSync Provides termination for CSync Yes, No
Status Grayed out for the VIDEO 60 BD N/A
[Set Parameters] To store the information permanently. To
reset the previously saved setting, select
“Last Setting” and select [Reset].

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–23


SERVICE MANUAL

Parameter Description Range


[Reset Board] Resets the Board to defaults
[Done] Exits the window without saving changes.

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Horizontal Parameters” Window


Horizontal
Parameter Description Range
Line Time Time in microseconds for one HSYNC cycle. 1.00-
99.99
Total Pixels Number of pixel clock pulses that occur in one 1 - 9999
per Line horizontal line.
Display Time Time in microseconds for active video in one 1.00 -
horizontal line. 99.99
Image Pixels Number of image pixels per line. A multiple of 4. 1 - 9999
Pixel Clock Pixel clock rate in MHz. The software calculates 1.000 -
Frequency value. 999.999
Sync Width Width in microseconds of the horizontal 0.000 -
synchronization pulses. 99.999
Back Porch Width in microseconds of the back porch. 0.000 -
99.999
Front Porch Width in microseconds of the front porch. The 0.000 -
software calculates the value. 99.999
Blanking Total in microseconds of the widths for the back 0.000 -
porch, front porch. The software calculates this value. 99.999
Hold Determines which value you select as the constant Display
during the setup. Time,
Image
Pixels
[Auto Do not select. Places the same number of black N/A
Horizontal pixels on either side of the image. Uses the selection
Centering] you make for “Shift Image Pixels...”.
Shift Image The number of pixels that the image will move to the -9999 to
Pixels L/R right or left when you select [Auto Centering]. 9999
Negative numbers move the image to the left, positive
numbers to the right.

6–24 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Vertical Parameters” Window


Vertical Parameter Description Range
Image Lines Per Frame Number of vertical image lines per frame 1 -
in the active video. 9999
Total Lines Per Frame Number of vertical lines including vertical 1 -
synchronization and equalization 9999
periods.
Vertical Back Porch (H) Number of vertical lines per field that 1 - 999
occur after the vertical sync pulse and
before the active video begins.
Vsync Width (H) Width of the vertical synchronization 1 - 99
pulse measured in Hsync pulses (H).
Pre-equalization Width (H) Width of the pre-equalization period 0 - 99
measured in Hsync pulses (H).
Post-equalization Width (H) Width of the post-equalization period 0 - 99
measured in Hsync pulses (H).
Interlaced Field Counter: Value is automatically calculated for the 0 - 225
(in HSyncs) number of lines or HSyncs by the
software for interlaced Modalities only.
Override Indicates if the “Interlaced Field Counter: Yes, No
(in HSyncs) is overridden.
ASync Video Compensation Selections for inserting serrating pulses. N/A
Interlaced Image Option Must be enabled if the image is Yes, No
interlaced.
Swap Fields Option Allows the order of the 2 fields (one for Yes, No
See “SMPTE Pattern odd lines and one for even lines) of an
Indicating Artifacts from interlaced image to be interchanged.
Swapped Fields” on
Page 17–21.
[Auto Vertical Centering] Adjusts the top to bottom centering of
the image on the film.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–25


SERVICE MANUAL

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Video Gain and Offset Parameters” Window
Parameter Description Range
Coarse Offset Coarse video offset control. One Coarse Offset 0 - 255;
step will provide a change of approximately default: 128
2 A/D counts.
Fine Offset Fine video offset control. One Fine Offset step 0 - 255;
will provide a change of approximately one half default: 128
A/D counts.
Coarse Gain Coarse video gain control. Set the gain level 0 - 255;
with the Coarse Gain before you use the Fine default: 128
Gain.
Fine Gain Fine video gain control. 0 - 255;
default: 128
LF Cable Low frequency compensation. Calculated value. 0-255
Compensation The lower the number, the longer the cable.
See “HF and LF Cable Compensation
Parameters” on Page 17–20.
HF Cable High frequency compensation. Calculated 0-255
Compensation value. The lower the number, the longer the
cable. See “HF and LF Cable Compensation
Parameters” on Page 17–20.
[Auto Offset] Sets the offset.
[Auto Gain] Sets the gain.
Enable Noise When enabled, this function adds 2 counts to Not Enabled
Clipping the Gain and subtracts 1 count from the Offset,
resulting in whites of value 255 and blacks of 0.

Note
To return to the procedure, See “Using [Auto Setup] to Configure the MIM 50 and
MIM 200/VIDEO 60 BOARD” on Page 6–12.

6–26 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Video Sync Parameters” Window


Parameter Description Range
Sync Input Selection of Sync Input Source. Composite
Source Video,
External
Composite
(Csync)
Composite Sync Input channel from which to derive the Yes, No
composite sync. Always the same channel as
the video signal.
External CSync Select to use External CSync Yes, No
RGB Sync Channel selection for Sync R, G, B
Source
External Polarity of the Sync Pulse. Negative,
Composite Sync Positive
Polarity

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–27


SERVICE MANUAL

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Pixel Clock Parameters” Window


Parameter Description Range
VCO Divisor External divisor setting for PLL. Select from Values from 3
drop-down menu. The Video Control - 80, but not
Oscillator (VCO) divisor maintains the VCO all numbers
frequency in the range of 75 to 150 MHz are included.
and is calculated automatically when you
select [Autorun].
VCO Frequency Automatically calculated when you select 75.00 -
[Autorun]. 150.00
Vsync Capacitor Vsync extraction Capacitor setting. 0 - 3: See the
Automatically calculated. See “Description table below.
of the Settings for Vsync Capacitor” on
Page 6–29.
Lock Detect Count If the PLL is locked, the value of this See the
parameter should equal the total pixels per description.
line in the Horizontal parameters. The value
is valid only after you execute a [Set].
VCO Gain Automatically calculated Settings 0-7

Phase Frequency Automatically calculated Settings 0-7


Detector Gain
Fine Phase Adjust: An internal setting of the PLL chip that Pixel Clock
Do not use unless adjusts the relationship of the pixel clock to Timing,
directed to do so the video signal: Same relationship that the which is more
by the TSC. “Pixel Clock Timing” adjusts. accurate
Pixel Clock Timing Calculated automatically to achieve the 0-255
best pixel sampling area.

6–28 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Description of the Settings for Vsync Capacitor


Setting H Line Time (microseconds) HSync Frequency (kHz)
0 0-14.29 69-100
1 14.49-32.26 31-68.99
2 32.25-55.56 18-30.99
3 55.57-64.00 and higher 0-17.99

Note
Return to the procedure, “Configuring the MIM 50 or MIM 200/VIDEO 60 BOARD”
on Page 6–20.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–29


SERVICE MANUAL

Configuring the MIM 200 and SPOOLER/VIDEO 60 BOARD, RGB

Important
• Before you can add a new Input, you must delete the existing Input from the
“Configuration” menu. The MIM 200 and MIM 50 can be multiple input
devices. Check to be sure you are deleting the correct device.
• See Tables “Fields and [Buttons] in the Video Board Setup Windows” on
Page 6–23 through “Fields and [Buttons] in the Pixel Clock Parameters
Window” on Page 6–28 for descriptions of parameters that you enter in this
procedure.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Input/Direct
Connect”. The “Configuration” window displays.

Note
A shortcut to open the “Configuration” window is to select the third [Hot Key] on
the Tool Bar.
[2] At the “Configuration” window, if 2 Inputs had previously been set up,
highlight the correct modality and select “Delete”.
[3] At the message, “Executing this command will delete the input from the
system. Are you sure?” select “Yes”. The KEYPAD goes off-line.
[4] From the “Configuration” window, select “Add” / “Video” and the correct
selection from the following choices:
• “Qualified Video 60”
• “Unqualified Video 60”

6–30 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Video Board Setup” Windows


Parameter Description Range
Video Input Channel The channel number 1,2,3,
RGB
[Config] Press to enter values for 5 Parameters:
[Horizontal Parameters] See Page 6–35.
[Vertical Parameters] See Page 6–36.
[Gain and Offset] See Page 6–37.
[Sync Parameters] See Page 6–38.
[Pixel Clock Parameters] See Page 6–39.
[Auto Setup] Automatically adjusts the values for
certain parameters.
[Acquire] from “Current Automatically captures and displays a test
Settings” or “Last Saved” image.
Ignore Lock Detect on When enabled, the SPOOLER captures Not
Acquire an image even if an error occurs. The Enabled
Do not enable this mode. software will not compute the “Lock
Detect Count”.
Ignore Signal Detect on The SPOOLER/Video will capture an Yes, No
Acquire image even if a signal is not present.
Frame Averaging This feature reduces the signal noise in Yes, No
the image. When you select “Frame default:
Averaging”, a window opens to the right of Off
the field, allowing you to enter the number
(2-4) of frames to average.
Terminate Input Video Provides 75 ohms at video input. Without Yes, No
See “RS-232/RS-422 this termination the image will indicate
CONVERTER” on ringing. Modalities with high pixel clock
Page 17–16. frequency will be affected most.
Terminate Ext CSync Provides termination for CSync Yes, No
Status Grayed out for the VIDEO 60 BD N/A
[Set Parameters] To store the information permanently. To
reset the previously saved setting, select
“Last Setting” and select [Reset].
[Reset Board] Resets the Board to defaults
[Done] Exits the window without saving changes.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–31


SERVICE MANUAL

[5] Do either (a) or (b):


(a) “Qualified Video 60”:
• Highlight the name of the Modality and select “OK” in the
“Qualified Video 60 Modalities” window to display the “Connect
Input Parameters” menu.
• In the “Primary Control” panel, use the drop down menus to make
one of the following selections:
– “Keypad Type” and “Com Port” for Keypad Control
– “Autofilming Type” and “Com Port” for Autofilming
(b) “Unqualified Video 60”: In the “Video Board Setup” window, enter the
correct input parameter information from the Modality Worksheet.

Note
To see the “Video Board Setup” window, see Page 6–30.
• Use Tables on Pages 6–31 through 6–39 and the Modality Spec Sheet on
Page 22–1 for input information and guidelines.
[6] Select “Set Parameters” from the “Video Board Setup” window.
[7] To configure the MIM 200 or SPOOLER/VIDEO, see the procedure on Page
6–16.

6–32 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Direct Connect Input Parameters


Input
Parameter Description Range
Board / INTERFACE BOARD on the PCI BUS / Video Board 1
Channel the active channel RGB
Logical Name Name of the BOARD receiving the input. 1 - 5 alphanumeric
Database Name of the modality. View only. 1 - 30 alphanumeric
Primary Primary method the customer uses to KEYPAD -
Control Type control MIM. Touchscreen or
Conventional
Autofilming: Hitachi,
KCL, P831, M952,
Siemens (DASM,
FSPOT, SPCI),
Toshiba, YMS
Primary Port for the KEYPAD or the serial control Keypad: COM 5 for
Control Com CABLE connection Single Input MIM
Port 50, 100 and DP
Server. For MIM
200 and Multiple
Input MIM 50 it is
COM 5, 7, or 9.
Autofilming RS232
(MIM 100 only):
COM 2
Autofilming RS422:
COM 4 for MIM
100NR and MIM 50.
For MIM 200 it is
COM 4, 6, or 8.
Auxiliary The field “Keypad” is automatically If Primary Control is
Control checked (in versions prior to V3.x) when • Autofilming: 4
Keypad you select autofilming as the Primary • Keypad:
Control. The type of Keypad is selectable
(in version 3.x and higher) depending on
the MIM.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–33


SERVICE MANUAL

Input
Parameter Description Range
Auxiliary The Com Port for the KEYPAD when it is If the Primary
Control Com used as auxiliary control. If the KEYPAD Control
Port is the Primary Control, then the “Auxiliary • Autofilming:
Control Com Port” is not user changeable. COM 4, 6, or 8
• Keypad: 5, 7, or
9
Aspect Ratio: Horizontal component of pixel aspect 1 - 255
Horizontal ratio. The software automatically
determines this ratio. When the aspect
ratio is not 1:1, the software corrects for
non-square pixels.
Aspect Ratio: Vertical component of pixel aspect ratio. 1 - 255
Vertical The software automatically determines
this ratio. When the aspect ratio is not 1:1,
the software corrects for non-square
pixels.
Page When enabled, this feature ensures that On, Off
Preallocation sufficient memory is available on the
HARD DISK to prevent a “Buffer Full”
condition while the SPOOLER stores a
page.

6–34 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Horizontal Parameters” Window


Horizontal
Parameter Description Range
Line Time Time in microseconds for one HSYNC cycle. 1.00-
99.99
Total Pixels Number of pixel clock pulses that occur in one 1 - 9999
per Line horizontal line.
Display Time Time in microseconds for active video in one 1.00 -
horizontal line. 99.99
Image Pixels Number of image pixels per line in multiples of 4. 1 - 9999
Pixel Clock Pixel clock rate in MHz. The software calculates 1.000 -
Frequency value. 999.999
Sync Width Width in microseconds of the horizontal 0.000 -
synchronization pulses. 99.999
Back Porch Width in microseconds of the back porch. 0.000 -
99.999
Front Porch Width in microseconds of the front porch. The 0.000 -
software calculates the value. 99.999
Blanking Total in microseconds of the widths for the back 0.000 -
porch, front porch. The software calculates this value. 99.999
Hold Determines which value you select as the constant Display
during the setup. Time,
Image
Pixels
[Auto Do not select. Places the same number of black
Horizontal pixels on either side of the image. Uses the selection
Centering] you make for “Shift Image Pixels...”.
Shift Image The number of pixels that the image will move to the -9999 to
Pixels L/R right or left when you select [Auto Centering]. 9999
Negative numbers move the image to the left, positive
numbers to the right.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–35


SERVICE MANUAL

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Vertical Parameters” Window


Vertical Parameter Description Range
Image Lines Per Frame Number of vertical image lines per frame 1 -
in the active video. 9999
Total Lines Per Frame Number of vertical lines including vertical 1 -
synchronization and equalization 9999
periods.
Vertical Back Porch (H) Number of vertical lines per field that 1 - 999
occur after the vertical sync pulse and
before the active video begins.
Vsync Width (H) Width of the vertical synchronization 1 - 99
pulse measured in Hsync pulses (H).
Pre-equalization Width (H) Width of the pre-equalization period 0 - 99
measured in Hsync pulses (H).
Post-equalization Width (H) Width of the post-equalization period 0 - 99
measured in Hsync pulses (H).
Interlaced Field Counter: Value is automatically calculated for the 0 - 225
(in HSyncs) number of lines or HSyncs by the
software for interlaced Modalities only.
Override Indicates if the “Interlaced Field Counter: Yes, No
(in HSyncs)” is overridden.
ASync Video Compensation Selections for inserting serrating pulses. N/A
Interlaced Image Option Must be enabled if the image is Yes, No
interlaced.
Swap Fields Option Allows the order of the 2 fields (one for Yes, No
See “SMPTE Pattern odd lines and one for even lines) of an
Indicating Artifacts from interlaced image to be interchanged.
Swapped Fields” on
Page 17–21.
[Auto Vertical Centering] Adjusts the top to bottom centering of N\A
the image on the film.

6–36 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Video Gain and Offset Parameters” Window
Parameter Description Range
Coarse Offset Coarse video offset control. One Coarse Offset 0 - 255;
step will provide a change of approximately default: 128
2 A/D counts.
Fine Offset Fine video offset control. One Fine Offset step 0 - 255;
will provide a change of approximately one half default: 128
A/D counts.
Coarse Gain Coarse video gain control. Set the gain level with 0 - 255;
the Coarse Gain before you use the Fine Gain. default: 128
Fine Gain Fine video gain control. 0 - 255;
default: 128
LF Cable Low frequency compensation. Calculated value. 0-255
Compensation The lower the number, the longer the cable.
See “HF and LF Cable Compensation
Parameters” on Page 17–20.
HF Cable High frequency compensation. Calculated value. 0-255
Compensation The lower the number, the longer the cable. See
“HF and LF Cable Compensation Parameters”
on Page 17–20.
[Auto Offset] Sets the offset.
[Auto Gain] Sets the gain.
Enable Noise When enabled, this function adds 2 counts to the Enabled ✔
Clipping Gain and subtracts 1 count from the Offset,
resulting in whites of value 255 and blacks of 0.

Note
To return to the procedure, see “Using [Auto Setup] to Configure the MIM 200 or
SPOOLER/VIDEO 60 BOARD” on Page 6–16.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–37


SERVICE MANUAL

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Video Sync Parameters” Window


Parameter Description Range
Sync Input Selection of Sync Input Source. Composite
Source Video,
External
Composite
(Csync)
Composite Sync Input channel from which to derive the Yes, No
composite sync. Always the same channel as
the video signal.
External CSync Select to use External CSync Yes, No
RGB Sync Channel selection for Sync R, G, B
Source
External Polarity of the Sync Pulse. Negative,
Composite Sync Positive
Polarity

6–38 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 60 Board

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Pixel Clock Parameters” Window


Parameter Description Range
VCO Divisor External divisor setting for PLL. Select from Values from
drop-down menu. The Video Control 3 - 80, but
Oscillator (VCO) divisor maintains the VCO not all
frequency in the range of 75 to 150 MHz numbers are
and is calculated automatically when you included.
select [Autorun].
VCO Frequency Automatically calculated when you select 75.00 -
[Autorun]. 150.00
Vsync Capacitor Vsync extraction Capacitor setting. 0 - 3: See
Automatically calculated. See “Description “Description
of the Settings for Vsync Capacitor” on of the
Page 6–40. Settings for
Vsync
Capacitor”
on Page 6–
40.
Lock Detect Count If the PLL is locked, the value should match See the
the total pixels per line in the “Horizontal description.
Parameters” menu. The value is valid only if
a [Set] was executed after the “Pixel Clock
Parameters” menu was opened.
VCO Gain Automatically calculated Settings 0-7

Phase Frequency Automatically calculated Settings 0-7


Detector Gain
Fine Phase Adjust An internal setting of the PLL chip that Lead, Lag
adjusts the relationship of the pixel clock to
the video signal.
Pixel Clock Timing Calculated automatically to make the 0-255
optimum pixel sampling area.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 6–39


SERVICE MANUAL

Description of the Settings for Vsync Capacitor


Setting H Line Time (microseconds) HSync Frequency (kHz)
0 0-14.29 69-100
1 14.49-32.26 31-68.99
2 32.25-55.56 18-30.99
3 55.57-64.00 and higher 0-17.99

Note
To return to the procedure, see Page 6–32.

6–40 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 150 Board

Section 7: Configuring the Input for the Video 150 Board

Introduction

Important
Before you begin installation, read the following to help you prepare for configuration of the MIM 100, then advance to Page 7–2:
• Will the primary control of the MIM 100 be the KEYPAD or Autofilming Link?
• Is the equipment Pre-staged?
– Pre-staged indicates that the equipment was shipped with the Modality parameters already installed and tested.
– The Pre-staged MIM 100 can be either Qualified or Unqualified.
• Will you connect the MIM 100 to a Qualified or Unqualified Modality?
– A Qualified Input indicates that the Modality has been field tested with correct parameters. The database in the Service Software for the MIM 100 may also
include this Modality in the Qualified list.
– An Unqualified Input indicates that the Modality has not been field tested.
• Check that the operator can provide you with a clinical image to evaluate image quality after you finish configuring the Input. The image must contain:
– Grayscale including the brightest and darkest values (0 to 255 A/D Counts)
– White text on black background, or black text on white background
– Sharp transitions and vertical lines

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 7–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Configuring the Input Parameters

Important

• See the Modality Spec Sheet provided with the MIM to determine correct
parameters. An example of the Spec. Sheet is indicated on Page 22–1.
• Is the Input installed?
– No: Do all steps in this procedure.
– Yes: Do Steps 1 and then do Steps 5 through 8 only.
[1] At “MIM Service Application”, select “Configure” / “Input” / “Direct Connect”.
[2] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” menu, select “Add” / “Video” /
“Qualified” / “Video 150”.
[3] Scroll down and select the Modality that you will install.
[4] In the “Primary Control” field, select the “Keypad Type” and the “Com Port”.
[5] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, select “Modify”.

Note
To view the configuration only, select “View”.
[6] At the message “Executing this communication will take the system off-line.
Are you sure?” select “OK”. The “Input Parameters” window displays.
[7] Use the Table “Input Parameters” on Page 7–3 to check that the information
is correct. If you do not change information, select [Cancel]. If you change
information, select [OK].
[8] Use the Table “Advancing to the Correct Procedure for the VIDEO 150 BD”
below to advance to the correct procedure:
Advancing to the Correct Procedure for the VIDEO 150 BD
Primary Control Type Pre-Staged Page
Autofilming N/A 7–4
Keypad Yes 7–7
No 7–11

7–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 150 Board

Input Parameters
Input Parameter Description Range
BOARD INTERFACE BOARD on the PCI BUS. Video Board 1
Channel Number Number of the channel of the INTERFACE BOARD. Channel 1
Logical Name Name of the BOARD receiving the input. 1 - 5 alphanumeric characters
Examples: MRI 1 or CTRM 1
Database Name Name of the modality. Viewable only. 1 - 30 alphanumeric characters
Primary Control Type Primary method the customer uses to control MIM. KEYPAD
Autofilming: Hitachi, KCL, P831, M952,
Siemens (DASM, FSPOT, SPCI), Toshiba,
YMS
Primary Control Com Port Port for the KEYPAD or the serial control CABLE Keypad: COM 5
connection Autofilming RS232 (MIM 100 only): COM 2
Autofilming RS422: COM 4
12 VDC Power Power for external FIBER OPTIC TRANSCEIVER Keypad: OFF
(MIM 100 only) (Hirschmann CONNECTOR) for RS232 PORT. Autofilming: On, Off
Autofilming only.
Auxiliary Control Keypad Indicates that the keypad is or is not enabled for Keypad: Off
auxiliary control when autofilming is the primary Autofilming: On
control. Important: For the MIM with autofilming,
“Auxiliary Control” is always On.
Auxiliary Control Port No. PORT for KEYPAD when it is the auxiliary control. Keypad: Not Applicable
Autofilming: COM 5
Aspect Ratio: Horizontal Horizontal component of pixel aspect ratio. The 1 - 255
software automatically determines this ratio. Aspect
ratios not equal to 1:1 correct for non-square pixels.
Aspect Ratio: Vertical Vertical component of pixel aspect ratio. The software 1 - 255
automatically determines this ratio. Aspect ratios not
equal to 1:1 correct for non-square pixels.
Page Preallocation When enabled, this feature ensures that sufficient On, Off
memory is available on the HARD DISK to prevent a
“Buffer Full” condition while MIM stores a page.

Note
To continue configuring the input parameters, return to Page 7–2.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 7–3


SERVICE MANUAL

Configuring the MIM for the Autofilming Mode

Important

• For autofilming, an RS232 or RS422 CABLE must be connected between the


Modality and the MIM.
• The MIM 100NR uses only RS-422. See Page 5–1 for more information on
the MIM 100NR. For autofilming connections that require RS-232, install the
CONVERTER KIT 8B8186 to convert the RS-232 signal to RS-422.
• The MIM 100 with RELAY BOARD and less than V_3.0 can use either
RS-232 or RS-422.
• See the Modality Spec Sheet provided with the MIM to determine correct
parameters. See Page 22–1 for an example of the Modality Spec Sheet.
[1] At the “Configuration” window, select “Autofilming/Modify”.
[2] When the COMPUTER prompts you “Are you sure?” select “OK”. The
“Autofilming” window displays.
[3] At the window for the type of autofilming at the site, enter the correct
information. See “Default Values for Autofilming Link Parameters” on
Page 7–5. and See “Autofilming Parameters for the MIM: Parameters
indicated by * do not apply to all types of autofilming” on Page 7–6..
[4] If you did not change information, select “Cancel”. If you changed
information, select “Set”.
[5] To determine the next step, See “Completing the Installation” on Page 2–
22.

7–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 150 Board

Default Values for Autofilming Link Parameters


Parameter Autofilming Link
Hitachi KCL P831 M952 Siemens Toshiba YMS
SPCI/
FSPOT DASM
Port ID -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Driver Type RS422 RS422 RS422 RS422 RS232* RS232* RS422 RS422
Baud Rate 4800 9600 1200 1200 2400 4800 9600 1200
Data Length 8 8 8 8 7 8 7 8
Stop Bits 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2
Parity even none even even odd even even odd
Store Key active active active active -- -- active active
ACK Wait Timer 3 5 6 6 2 2 1 --
Receive Message Timer -- 5 6 6 -- -- 1 --
Start Timer -- 2 -- -- 1 1 -- --
EOT Wait Timer -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 --
Switch Mode -- Keypad -- -- -- -- Keypad --
Switch Handling -- Not -- -- -- -- -- --
Allowed
Report Alarms -- -- On -- -- -- -- --
Automatic Film Type -- -- -- -- Off Off -- --
Selection
DTR Connection -- -- -- -- -- -- On --
Establishment
Default Horizontal Frames -- -- -- -- -- -- 3 --
Default Vertical Frames -- -- -- -- -- -- 4 --

Note
*Supported by the MIM 100 only. All other models must have RS-232 converted to RS-422. See the “Important” at the top of Page 7–4.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 7–5


SERVICE MANUAL

Autofilming Parameters for the MIM: Parameters indicated by * do not apply to all types of autofilming
Item Description Range
Port Id SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT MIM 100: COM2, COM4
MIM 50, 100NR: COM4
Driver Type Driver protocol of the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT MIM 100: RS-232, RS-422
MIM 50, 100NR: RS422
Baud Rate Baud Rate of the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
Data Length Number of bits for serial communications 7, 8
Stop Bits Number of stop bits for serial communications 1, 2
Parity Setting of parity for SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT None, even, odd
Store Key* Determines if [Store] on the KEYPAD is active when the system uses auxiliary control Active, Inactive
ACK Wait Timer* Acknowledgment wait timer. The time in seconds that the MIM will wait after it sends a message 1 - 999
until the imaging device acknowledges that it received the message.
Receive Message Timer* Specifies the amount of time in seconds allowed to receive an entire message. 1 - 999
Start Timer* Specifies the time (seconds) that the MIM waits for the Modality to reply to a handshake character. 1 - 999
EOT Wait Timer* Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the MIM waits to receive an End of Transmission 1- 999
(EOT) character from the Imaging Device.
Switch Mode* Allows you to designate printing films using either the Console of the Imaging Device (Host) or the Keypad, Host
Auxiliary KEYPAD.
Switch Handling* The process used to handle stored images when filming is switched between the Host and the Not Allowed
Auxiliary KEYPAD.
Report Alarms* Flag indicating if the MIM reports to the modality alarm conditions associated with the PRINTER. On, Off
Automatic Film Type Selection* Flag that indicates if the SUPPLY MAGAZINE in the LASER PRINTER must be used to On, Off
automatically select the film size and film base.
DTR Connection Specifies the amount of time in seconds the MIM must wait for the Imaging Device to respond to a 1 - 999
Establishment* handshake character.
Default Horizontal Frames* The number of horizontal frames in page format that the MIM defaults to. 1-9
Default Vertical Frames* The number of vertical frames in page format that the MIM defaults to. 1-9

Note
To continue configuring the autofilming mode, return to Page 7–4.

7–6 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 150 Board

Using [Auto Setup] to Configure the MIM 100/VIDEO 150 BOARD

Important

• The instructions in this procedure are for the MIM 100 and MIM 100NR only.
• The MIM must be energized for at least 5 minutes before you select “Auto
Setup”. The VIDEO BOARD requires about 5 minutes to stabilize.
• Check that the operator can provide a test pattern from the Modality, such as
a SMPTE or Grayscale pattern. If test pattern is not available, choose the
best clinical image that meets the following requirements:
– Grayscale with brightest and darkest values (0 to 255 A/D Counts)
– White text on black background or black text on white background
– Sharp transitions and vertical lines
[1] At “MIM Service Application”, select “Configure/Input/Direct Connect”.

Important
A Modality must already be set up in the configuration before you do Step 2.
[2] At the “Configuration” window, select “Acquisition/Modify”.
[3] At the “Modify Parameters” window, select “OK”.
[4] At the “Video Board Setup” window, select “Auto Setup”.

Important
Wait about 2 minutes until the “Status” line in the “Video Board Setup” window
displays the message “Auto Board Setup Complete”. The “Status” line indicates
each of the 9 setup tasks for troubleshooting steps. See “The 9 Tasks Completed
During [Auto Setup] for the VIDEO 150 BOARD” on Page 7–8.. If Autosetup does
not finish, see Help Files “Autosetup Failures”.
[5] After you review the Table on Page 7–8, advance to Step 6.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 7–7


SERVICE MANUAL

The 9 Tasks Completed During [Auto Setup] for the VIDEO 150 BOARD
No. Tasks Displayed in Status Line Associated Parameter Window: Field
1 “Input source sync auto-set” Video Sync Parameters: [Auto Hsync] and [Auto Vsync]
2 “PLL control voltage auto set” Pixel Clock Parameters: [Auto Control Voltage]
3 “PCLK to Hsync auto-align” Pixel Clock Parameters: [Auto Hsync to Clock]
4 “Gains and offsets auto-level” Gain and Offset Parameters: [Auto Level]
5 “Horizontal auto-framing” Horizontal Parameters: [Auto Horizontal Centering]
6 “PCLK to Data Phase auto-align” Pixel Clock Parameters: [Auto Pixel Clock]
7 “Horizontal auto-framing” Horizontal Parameters: [Auto Horizontal Centering]
8 “Vertical auto-framing” Vertical Parameters: [Auto Vertical Centering]
9 “Auto setup end” Indicates completion of auto setup.

Note
To continue configuring the VIDEO 150 BOARD, advance to Step 6.

7–8 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 150 Board

[6] Select “Set”.


[7] At the “Video Board Setup”, select “Acquire” to evaluate the image.
[8] Select a Region of Interest (ROI) and display the uncompressed ROI image:
(a) Use the MOUSE to click-and-drag a rectangle around an ROI: You
must drag the MOUSE from the top-left position of the ROI to the
bottom-right position of the ROI.
(b) Release the MOUSE click. The uncompressed image displays.

Important

• To determine pixel values, observe the “Pixel Value” window while you move
the cursor over the image.
• You might have to execute several acquires to completely evaluate the
quality of the image.
• To create a histogram, do Step 7 again within the existing uncompressed
image.
• To save the ROI, select “Save ROI”.
[9] Observe that the test image indicates the following properties for good
image quality:
• Correct Gain and Offset:
Brightest white: Pixel values of 253 + 2 counts
Darkest Black: Pixel values of 2 + 2 counts
Visible 5% and 95% grayscale values if you display the SMPTE
pattern.
• Centered horizontally and vertically
• Correct Clock Timing: No visible pixel shift or line shift
• Straight, undistorted horizontal and vertical lines
• Clear text. Ask the operator to type more text if necessary
• Sharp transitions between maximum and minimum grayscale values

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 7–9


SERVICE MANUAL

[10] If you must modify the video parameters see:


• See “Troubleshooting Guide for the Acquired Image” on Page 7–10. or
“Help Files”
• See “Fields and [Buttons] in the “Video Gain and Offset Parameters””
on Page 7–20. for descriptions of the “Gain and Offset” parameters.
[11] Select the necessary configuration button, for example “Gain and Offset
Parameters”.
[12] Enter the changes and select “OK”.
[13] At the “Video Board Setup” window, select “Set”.
[14] Do Steps 7 through 13 until you are satisfied with the test image.
[15] Close the test image.
[16] To store the configuration window, select “Set”.
[17] At the “Configuration” window, select “Cancel”.
[18] Store and print 2 or more clinical images.
[19] To determine the next step, See “Completing the Installation” on Page 2–
22.

Troubleshooting Guide for the Acquired Image


Malfunction Remedy
Maximum grayscale counts not 253 + 2 counts. In the “Video Gain and Offset Parameters” window, adjust the values for “Fine Gain” and “Fine Offset”.
Minimum grayscale counts not 2 + 2 counts. Adjust these values 10 steps at a time. Increasing the “Gain” will cause the white pixel counts to
increase without affecting the black pixels. Increasing the “Offset” will cause the white and black pixel
counts to increase.
Pixel shift or line shift in the vertical lines or in the text of the Check that the Modality MONITOR displays the correct test image. Execute [Auto Setup] again. Ask
image. the operator to add more text to the image if you do not have sufficient text to evaluate.
The acquired image does not include all of the image In the “Video Vertical Parameters” window, adjust the values for the “Images Lines / Frame”. In the
information that the modality monitor displays. “Video Horizontal Parameters” window, adjust the values for the “Image Pixels / Line”. Increasing
these values will increase the area of the image that the VIDEO BOARD requires.
Blurred text. In the “Video Vertical Parameters” window, swap fields.

7–10 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 150 Board

Configuring the Video 150 Board that is Not Pre-Staged

Important
Before you can add a new Input, you must delete the existing Input from the
“Configuration” menu. The MIM is a single input device.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure” / “Input” /
“Direct Connect”.

Note
A shortcut to open the “Configuration” window is to select the third [Hot Key] from
the left on the Tool Bar.
[2] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, if a modality had
previously been set up, select “Delete”.
[3] At the message, “Executing this command will delete the input from the
system. Are you sure?” select “Yes”.
[4] From the “Configuration” window, select “Add” / “Video” and either
“Qualified” or “Unqualified”.
[5] Advance to Step 6.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 7–11


SERVICE MANUAL

[6] Do either (a) or (b):


(a) Qualified: In the “Qualified Video 150 Modalities” window, highlight the
name of the Modality and select “OK”.
(b) Unqualified: Enter the correct input parameter information:
• “Keypad Type” and “Com Port” for Primary Control of “Keypad”
• “Autofilming Type” and “Com Port” for “Autofilming”

Note
Use the Tables on Page 7–3 through Page 7–23 and the “Modality Spec. Sheet”
on Page 22–1 to help you understand how to correctly complete Step 6 for an
Unqualified Modality. The Table on Page 22–1 indicates an example of the
“Modality Spec. Sheet.”
[7] After you complete entering, select [Set] in the “Video Board Setup” window
indicated on Page 7–15.
[8] Advance to Page 7–7 and do the procedure “Using [Auto Setup] to
Configure the MIM 100/Video 150 BOARD”.

7–12 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 150 Board

Input Parameters
Input
Parameter Description Range
BOARD INTERFACE BD on the PCI BUS Video 150 BOARD
Channel Number of the channel of the Channel 1
Number INNTERFACE BD.
Logical Name for a particular input. 1 - 5 alphanumeric characters
Name Examples: MRI 1 or CTRM 1
Database Name of the modality. Viewable 1 - 30 alphanumeric
Name only. characters
Primary Primary method the customer uses KEYPAD Autofilming: Hitachi,
Control to control MIM. KCL, P831, M952, Siemens
Type (DASM, FSPOT, SPCI),
Toshiba, YMS
Primary Port for the KEYPAD or the Keypad: COM 5
Control SERIAL CONTROL CABLE Autofilming RS422: COM 4
Com Port connection. Autofilming RS232: COM 2
12 V DC Power to external Hirschman MIM 100 only: Yes, No
Power CONNECTOR for RS-232 Port for
Autofilming only.
Auxiliary The field “Keypad” is automatically If the Primary Control is
Control checked when you select • Autofilming: 4
KEYPAD autofilming as the Primary Control, • Keypad:
indicating that the KEYPAD is
enabled for auxiliary control.
Auxiliary The Com Port for the KEYPAD If the Primary Control is
Control when it is used as auxiliary control. • Autofilming: COM 5
Com Port If the KEYPAD is the Primary • Keypad: Not applicable
Control, then the “Auxiliary Control
Com Port” is not user changeable.
Aspect Horizontal component of pixel 1 - 255
Ratio: aspect ratio. The software
Horizontal automatically determines this ratio.
When the aspect ratio is not 1:1, it
corrects for non-square pixels.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 7–13


SERVICE MANUAL

Input
Parameter Description Range
Aspect Vertical component of pixel aspect 1 - 255
Ratio: ratio. Software automatically
Vertical determines this ratio. When the
aspect ratio is not 1:1, it corrects
for non-square pixels.
Page Pre- When enabled, this feature On, Off
allocation ensures that sufficient memory is
available on the HARD DISK to
prevent a “Buffer Full” condition
while the MIM stores a page.

7–14 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 150 Board

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Video Board Setup” Windows:


Parameter Description Range
Video Input Channel The channel number 1
[Config] Press to enter values for following 5 N/A
parameters
[Horizontal See Page 7–17.
Parameters]
[Vertical Parameters] See Page 7–18.
[Gain and Offset] See Page 7–20.
[Sync Parameters] See Page 7–21.
[Pixel Clock See Page 7–23.
Parameters]
[Auto Setup] Automatically adjusts the values for certain
parameters. See “Status”.
[Acquire] from Automatically captures and displays a test
“Current Settings” or image.
“Last Saved”
Ignore Lock Detect When enabled, the MIM 100 will capture an Yes, No
image even if an error occurs. The MIM
should never be left in this mode.
Frame Averaging This feature provides smoothing of the signal Yes, No
noise in the image. When you select “Frame default:
Averaging,” a window opens to the right of Off
the field, allowing you to enter the number
(2-4) of frames to average.
Terminate Input Video Provides termination of 75 ohms at the Yes, No
composite video input. Without this
termination the image will indicate ringing.
Modalities with high pixel clock frequency will
be affected most.
Status Indicates when the software executes each See
of the 9 [Auto Setup] tasks. Page
7–8

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 7–15


SERVICE MANUAL

Parameter Description Range


[Set] • To store the information permanently,
deselect “Temporary” and select [Set].
• To store information until the next time
you energize the MIM, select
“Temporary” / [Set].
• To reset to the video parameter defaults
(all zeroes) set at the factory, select
“Factory Setting” and select [Reset].
• To reset to the previously saved setting,
select “Last Setting” and select [Reset].
[Cancel] Exits the window without saving changes.

7–16 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 150 Board

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Horizontal Parameters” Window:


Horizontal
Parameter Description Range
Line Time Time in microseconds for one HSYNC cycle. 1.00- 99.99
Total Pixels Number of pixel clock pulses that occur in one 1 - 9999
per Line horizontal line.
Display Time Time in microseconds for active video in one 1.00 - 99.99
horizontal line.
Image Pixels Number of image pixels per line: multiple of 4. 1 - 9999
Pixel Clock Pixel clock rate in Megahertz. The software 1.000 -
Frequency calculates value. 999.999
Pixel Clock Selection of independent parameters used to Hor. Line
Freq. Bias calculate the pixel clock frequency. Time, Total
Pixels per Line
[Calculate] Calculates the pixel clock frequency using the N/A
“Horizontal Line Time uS” and “Total Pixels
Per Line” with the option of holding the display
time or the image pixels constant. The
software requires “Horizontal Display Time
uS” and/or “Image Pixels” to be entered to
perform the calculation.
Sync Width Width in microseconds of the horizontal 0.000 - 99.999
synchronization pulses.
Back Porch Width in microseconds of the back porch. 0.000 - 99.999
Front Porch Width in microseconds of the front porch. The 0.000 - 99.999
software calculates the value.
Blanking Total in microseconds of the widths for the 0.000 - 99.999
back porch, front porch. The software
calculates this value.
[Auto Do not select. Places same number of black N/A
Centering] pixels on either side of the image. Uses the
selection you make for “Shift Image Pixels...”.
Shift Image The number of pixels that the image will move -9999 to 9999
Pixels L/R to the right or left when you select [Auto
Centering]. Negative numbers move the
image to the left, positive numbers to the right.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 7–17


SERVICE MANUAL

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Vertical Parameters” Window:


Vertical Parameter Description Range
Image Lines Per Frame Number of vertical image lines per frame, occurring after the vertical sync pulse before the active video begins. 1 - 9999
Total Lines Per Frame Number of vertical lines including vertical synchronization and equalization periods. 1 - 9999
Vertical Back Porch (H) Number of vertical lines per field that occur after the vertical sync pulse and before the active video begins. 1 - 999
Vsync Width (H) Width of the vertical synchronization pulse measured in Hsync pulses (H). 1 - 99
Pre-equalization Width (H) Width of the pre-equalization period measured in Hsync pulses (H). 0 - 99
Post-equalization Width (H) Width of the post-equalization period measured in Hsync pulses (H). 0 - 99
Interlaced Field Counter Value is automatically calculated by the software for interlaced Modalities only. 0 - 225
Override Indicates if the Interlaced Field Counter is overridden. Yes, No
Serrations Number of serration pulses that occur during the vertical synchronization pulse period. This number typically is one or 2 times 0 - 99
the Vsync Width, and it is set by the Double H Frequency/Equalization Serration option. The software calculates this value.

7–18 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 150 Board

Vertical Parameter Description Range


Pre-equalization Width Number of serration pulses that occur during the pre-equalization pulse period. This number typically is one or 2 times the 0 - 99
Pulses Pre-equalization Width, and it is set by the Double H Frequency/Equalization Serration option. The software calculates this
value.
Post-equalization Width Number of serration pulses that occur during the post-equalization pulse period. This number typically is one or two times the 0 - 99
Pulse Post-equalization Width, and it is set by the Double H Frequency/Equalization Serration option. The software calculates this
value.
Vsync Serrations Present Indicates that serration pulses exist during the Vsync period. Yes, No
Double H Frequency/ If enabled, the frequency of occurrence for serration pulses during the vertical period is twice the rate of Hsync pulses. If not Yes, No
Equalization Serration enabled, the frequencies are the same.
Option
Interlaced Image Option Must be enabled if the image is interlaced. Yes, No
Swap Fields Option Allows the order of the 2 fields (one for odd lines and one for even lines) of an interlaced image to be interchanged. Yes, No
Insert Vsync Serrations Enable this option to insert serration pulses during the vertical interval for modalities that do not contain serration pulses. Also, Yes, No
Option this option can provide replacement pulses for image devices that have incorrect timing.
Insert Equalization Pulses Enable this option to insert pre-equalization and post-equalization pulses on either side of the Vsync. The equalization pulses Yes, No
outside Vsync are in terms of Hsync pulses. You must insert these equalization pulses for modalities that either have incorrect timing or that
do not provide serration pulses during Vsync. Incorrect timing can cause tearing at the top of the image.
Pre-Equalization H The number of Hsync pulses that occur before the Vsync pulse. The “Insert Equalization Pulses Outside Vsync” must be 0 - 99
Insertion enabled: “Yes”.
Post-Equalization H The number of Hsync pulses that occur after the Vsync pulse. The “Insert Equalization Pulses Outside Vsync” must be 0 - 99
Insertion enabled: “Yes”.
[Auto Vertical Centering] Calculates the Vertical Back Porch and the Image Lines. The Image Lines cannot be determined automatically for images that N\A
have zero lines for the vertical front porch.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 7–19


SERVICE MANUAL

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Video Gain and Offset Parameters”


Parameter Description Range
Coarse Offset Coarse video offset control. One Coarse 0 - 255; default:
Offset step will provide a change of 128
approximately 2 A/D counts.
Fine Offset Fine video offset control. One Fine Offset 0 - 255; default:
step will provide a change of 128
approximately one half A/D counts.
Coarse Gain Coarse video gain control. Set the gain 0 - 255; default:
level with the Coarse Gain before you use 128
the Fine Gain.
Fine Gain Fine video gain control. 0 - 255; default:
128
Amp Offset Do not adjust this level from 150 unless 0- 255;
you are directed to do so by TSC. The MIM:
Amp Offset sets the offset voltage applied pre-production
to the variable video amplifiers. Used in boards = 205;
conjunction with the coarse and fine gain production board
offset controls. = 150
[Auto Level] Select this button to automatically N/A
calculate gain and offset. An optimum
calculation depends on each input value
being near its associated default value and
on the gray scale with both the brightest
and darkest levels.

7–20 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 150 Board

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Video Sync Parameters” Window:


Parameter Description Range
Sync Input Selection of sync: Composite Video, External Composite
(Csync), or separate External Hsync and External Vsync. The
default is Composite Video.
Composite Input channel from which to derive the 1, 2, 3, 4;
Sync composite sync. Normally the same channel default 1
as the video signal, which will be chosen
automatically when you select “Set”.
External Sync Input channel from which to derive the external 1, 2, 3, 4;
Input Csync, Hsync, or Hsync-Vsync. Normally the default 1
same channel as the video signal, which will
be chosen automatically when you select
[Set].
Positive Set for positive going External Csync or Yes, No
External External Hsync signals.
Hsync
Positive Set for positive going External Csync or Yes, No
External External Hsync signals.
Vsync
Ext. Sync Setting for Hsync or Vsync slicing level. A 0 - 255;
Level H/V value of 127 shifts the incoming Sync to 0 V default 127
DC. A value of 0 shifts the slicing level to -3.0
volts. A value of 255 shifts the slicing level to
+3 volts. Selecting “Auto Hsync” and “Auto
Vsync” automatically calculates these values.
Low Voltage When you select “Auto Hsync” or “Auto Vsync” 0 - 255;
H/V for an external sync only, the software default 0
determines the Low Voltage H/V necessary to
correctly amplify or attenuate the incoming
Sync. The range of -3 volts to +3 volts is
associated with 0 to 255 counts. You cannot
directly change this value.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 7–21


SERVICE MANUAL

Parameter Description Range


High Voltage When you select “Auto Hsync” or “Auto Vsync” 0 - 255;
H/V for an external sync only, the software default 0
determines the High Voltage H/V necessary to
correctly amplify or attenuate the incoming
Sync. The range of -3 volts to +3 volts is
associated with 0 to 255 counts. You cannot
directly change this value.
[Auto Hsync] Select this button to automatically determine N/A
the Hsync slicing level. The software
calculates the Hsync slicing level as the
average of the maximum and the minimum
values between -3.0 and +3.0 volts.
Composite Video applied to the External
Hsync input will result in an erroneous slicing
level.
[Auto Vsync] Select this button to automatically determine N/A
the Vsync slicing level. The software
calculates the Vsync slicing level as the
average of the maximum and the minimum
values between -3.0 and +3.0 volts.
Composite Video applied to the External
Hsync input will result in an erroneous slicing
level.

7–22 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Input for the Video 150 Board

Fields and [Buttons] in the “Pixel Clock Parameters” Window:


Parameter Description Range
VCO Divisor External divisor setting for PLL. The Video Control 1, 2, 4, 8
Oscillator (VCO) divisor maintains the VCO
frequency in the range of 75 to 150 MHz and is
calculated when you select [Autorun].
VCO Calculated when you select [Autorun]. 75.00 -
Frequency 150.00
Vsync Vsync extraction Capacitor setting. Automatically See the
Capacitor calculated. See the Table on Page 7–21. Table on
Page 7–
21.
Control VCO tuning voltage setting that provides minimum 0-63;
Voltage jitter and fast lock up times. default: 32
Pixel Clock Pixel clock to data phase selection. Each step 0-255;
Timing represents a phase shift of approximately 1 default 0
nanosecond. Pixel clock jitter increases as the Pixel
Clock Timing increases: Use the minimum value
that provides an acceptable image.
Hsync to Pixel clock to Horizontal Sync pulse delay. Prevents 0 - 255;
Clock Delay line shift artifacts occurring from race conditions. default 0
[Auto Control Select this button to automatically adjust the PLL
Voltage] control voltage, ensuring correct lock.
[Auto Pixel Select this button to adjust the pixel clock phase
Clock] setting, maximizing pixel-to- pixel contrast.
[Auto Hsync Select this button to automatically adjust the pixel
to Clock] clock to Hsync delay setting, minimizing the
probability of horizontal line shift.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 7–23


SERVICE MANUAL

Description of the Settings for Vsync Capacitor


Setting H Line Time (microseconds) HSync Frequency (kHz)
0 0-14.29 69-100
1 14.49-32.26 31-68.99
2 32.25-55.56 18-30.99
3 55.57-64.00 and higher 0-17.99

Note
Return to Page 7–12.

7–24 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Digital Input

Section 8: Configuring the Digital Input

Introduction

Important
Use this Section to configure the DIGITAL BOARD for the MIM 200, MIM 100, MIM 50, or the SPOOLER/Digital. To help you better prepare for configuration, please
read the following information to help you prepare for configuration. Then advance to Page 8–2.
• Will the primary control of the MIM Product be the KEYPAD or an Autofilming Link?
• Is the MIM product Pre-staged? Will you be connecting it to a Qualified or Unqualified Modality?
– A pre-staged MIM product is shipped with the Modality parameters already installed and tested. The Pre-staged MIM product can be either Qualified or
Unqualified.
– A Qualified Input indicates that the Modality has been field tested with correct parameters. The database in the Service Software for the MIM product may also
include this Modality in the Qualified list.
– An Unqualified Input indicates that the Modality has not been field tested.
– For a Digital MIM that is pre-staged correctly for the Modality and has correct cables connected, the “Configuring the Input” procedure is not necessary.
• Check that the operator can provide you with a clinical image to evaluate image quality after you finish configuring the Input. The image must contain:
– Grayscale including the brightest and darkest values (0 to 255 A/D Counts)
– White text on black background, or black text on white background
– Sharp transitions and vertical lines

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 8–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Configuring the Input Parameters

Important

• See the “Modality Spec Sheet” provided with product to determine correct
parameters. See the example on Page 22–1.
• Is the Input installed?
– No: Do all steps in this procedure.
– Yes: Do Steps 1 and then do Steps 6 through 7 only.
[1] At “MIM Service Application,” select “Configure” / “Input” / “Direct Connect”.
[2] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” menu:
(a) If the Input is not configured:
1. Select [Add] “Qualified Digital Modalities” window.
2. Scroll to select the Modality that you will install.
3. Select [OK].
(b) If the Input is configured:
1. Select [Modify].
2. At the message “Executing this communication will take the
system off-line. Are you sure?” select “OK”.
[3] Advance to Step 4.

8–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Digital Input

Note
The selection “Board 1 or Board 2 Channel 1” automatically appears in the
“Board/Channel” field.
[4] In the “Primary Control” field, select the “Keypad Type” and the “Com Port”.
[5] If this is Autofilming, select the “Keypad Type” and the “Com Port” in the
Auxiliary Control section of the window.
[6] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, select “Modify”.

Note
To view the configuration only, select “View”.
[7] Use the Table on Page 8–4 to check that the information is correct. If you
do not change information, select [Cancel]. If you change information,
select [OK].
[8] Use the Table on Page 8–3 to advance to the correct procedure.
Configuring the Input
Primary Control Type Page
Autofilming 8–5
Keypad 8–9

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 8–3


SERVICE MANUAL

Input Parameters
Input Parameter Description Range
Board INTERFACE BOARD on the PCI BUS. Digital Board 1
Channel Number Number of the channel of the INTERFACE BOARD. Channel 1
Logical Name Name of the BOARD receiving the input. 1 - 5 alphanumeric characters
Examples: MRI 1 or CTRM 1
Database Name Name of the modality. Viewable only. 1 - 30 alphanumeric characters
Primary Control Type Primary method the customer uses to control MIM. KEYPAD
Autofilming: Hitachi, KCL, P831, M952,
Siemens (DASM, FSPOT, SPCI), Toshiba,
YMS
Primary Control Com Port Port for the KEYPAD or the serial control CABLE Keypad: COM 5 for MIM 50, 100 and DP
connection Server. For MIM 200 it is COM 5, 7, or 9.
Autofilming RS232 (MIM 100 only): COM 2
Autofilming RS422: COM 4 for MIM 100NR
and MIM 50. For MIM 200 it is COM 4, 6, or
8.
12 VDC Power Power for external FIBER OPTIC TRANSCEIVER Keypad: OFF
(MIM 100 with Relay (Hirschmann CONNECTOR) for RS232 PORT. Autofilming: On, Off
Board only) Autofilming only.
Auxiliary Control Keypad Indicates that the keypad is or is not enabled for Keypad: Off
auxiliary control when autofilming is the primary Autofilming: On
control. Important: For the MIM with autofilming,
“Auxiliary Control” is always On.
Auxiliary Control Port No. The Com Port for the KEYPAD when it is used as Keypad: Not Applicable
auxiliary control. If the KEYPAD is the Primary Autofilming: COM 5
Control, then the “Auxiliary Control Com Port” is not
user changeable.
Aspect Ratio: Horizontal Horizontal component of pixel aspect ratio. The 1 - 255
software automatically determines this ratio. Aspect
ratios not equal to 1:1 correct for non-square pixels.

8–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Digital Input

Input Parameter Description Range


Aspect Ratio: Vertical Vertical component of pixel aspect ratio. The software 1 - 255
automatically determines this ratio. Aspect ratios not
equal to 1:1 correct for non-square pixels.
Page Preallocation When enabled, this feature ensures that sufficient On, Off
memory is available on the HARD DISK to prevent a
“Buffer Full” condition while MIM stores a page.

Configuring the MIM Product for the Autofilming Mode

Important

• For autofilming, an RS232 or RS422 CABLE must be connected between the


Modality and the MIM Product with software V_3.x.
• The MIM Products use only RS-422. See “Checking the Service Tracking
Information” on Page 5–1. for more information on the MIM 100NR.
• For autofilming connections that require RS-232, install the CONVERTER
KIT 8B8186 to convert to RS-422.
• See the “Modality Spec Sheet” provided with the MIM to determine correct
parameters. See “Video Input Modality Spec Sheet” on Page 22–1. for an
example of the “Modality Spec Sheet.”
[1] At the “Configuration” window, select “Autofilming/Modify”.
[2] When the COMPUTER prompts you “Are you sure?” select “OK”. The
“Autofilming” window displays.
[3] At the window for the type of autofilming at the site, enter the correct
information. See the Tables on Page 8–6 and Page 8–7.
[4] If you did not change information, select [Cancel]. If you changed
information, select [Set].
[5] To determine the next step, See “Completing the Installation” on Page 2–
22.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 8–5


SERVICE MANUAL

Default Values for Autofilming Link Parameters


Parameter Autofilming Link
Hitachi KCL P831 M952 Siemens Toshiba YMS
SPCI/
FSPOT DASM
Port ID -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Driver Type RS422 RS422 RS422 RS422 RS232* RS232* RS422 RS422
Baud Rate 4800 9600 1200 1200 2400 4800 9600 1200
Data Length 8 8 8 8 7 8 7 8
Stop Bits 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2
Parity even none even even odd even even odd
Store Key active active active active -- -- active active
ACK Wait Timer 3 5 6 6 2 2 1 --
Receive Message Timer -- 5 6 6 -- -- 1 --
Start Timer -- 2 -- -- 1 1 -- --
EOT Wait Timer -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 --
Switch Mode -- Keypad -- -- -- -- Keypad --
Switch Handling -- Not -- -- -- -- -- --
Allowed
Report Alarms -- -- On -- -- -- -- --
Automatic Film Type -- -- -- -- Off Off -- --
Selection
DTR Connection -- -- -- -- -- -- On --
Establishment
Default Horizontal Frames -- -- -- -- -- -- 3 --
Default Vertical Frames -- -- -- -- -- -- 4 --

Note
*Supported by the MIM 100 only. All other models must have RS-232 converted to RS-422. See the “Important” at the top of Page 8–5.

8–6 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Digital Input

Autofilming Parameters for the MIM: Parameters indicated by * do not apply to all types of autofilming
Item Description Range
Port Id SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT MIM 100: COM2, COM4
MIM 50, 100NR: COM4
MIM 200: COM4, 6, and 8
Multiple Input MIM 50: COM4, 6, and 8
Driver Type Driver protocol of the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORTS MIM 100: RS-232, RS-422
MIM 50, 100NR: RS422
MIM 200: COM4, 6, and 8
Baud Rate Baud Rate of the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
Data Length Number of bits for serial communications 7, 8
Stop Bits Number of stop bits for serial communications 1, 2
Parity Setting of parity for SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT None, even, odd
Store Key* Determines if [Store] on the KEYPAD is active when the system uses auxiliary control Active, Inactive
ACK Wait Timer* Acknowledgment wait timer. The time in seconds that the MIM will wait after it sends a 1 - 999
message until the Imaging Device acknowledges that it received the message.
Receive Message Timer* Specifies the amount of time in seconds allowed to receive an entire message. 1 - 999
Start Timer* Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the MIM waits for the Imaging Device to 1 - 999
reply to a handshake character.
EOT Wait Timer* Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the MIM waits to receive an End of 1- 999
Transmission (EOT) character from the Imaging Device.
Switch Mode* Allows you to designate printing films using either the Console of the Imaging Device Keypad, Host
(Host) or the Auxiliary KEYPAD.
Switch Handling* The process used to handle stored images when filming is switched between the Host Not Allowed
and the Auxiliary KEYPAD.
Report Alarms* Flag indicating if the MIM reports to the modality alarm conditions associated with the On, Off
PRINTER.
Automatic Film Type Selection* Flag that indicates if the SUPPLY MAGAZINE in the LASER PRINTER must be used to On, Off
automatically select the film size and film base.
DTR Connection Establishment* The time (seconds) the MIM must wait for the Modality to respond to a handshake 1 - 999
character.
Default Horizontal Frames* The number of horizontal frames in page format that the MIM defaults to. 1-9
Default Vertical Frames* The number of vertical frames in page format that the MIM defaults to. 1-9

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 8–7


SERVICE MANUAL

Note
To continue configuring the MIM Product for autofilming, return to Page 8–5.

8–8 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Configuring the Digital Input

Configuring the Digital Input

Important
Configure the digital input for the smallest image size that the site uses.
• See the Modality Spec Sheet provided with MIM to determine correct
parameters. An example is provided on Page 22–1.
• To advance to each entry in the “Digital Interface Parameters” window, press
[Tab] on the LAPTOP.
[1] From the “Configuration” window, select “Acquisition” / “Modify”.
[2] When the COMPUTER prompts you “Are you sure?”, select “OK”. The
“Digital Interface Parameters” window displays.

Note
To view the “Digital Interface Parameters,” select “Acquisition” / “View”.
[3] Use the Table on Page 8–10 to check that the information in the “Digital
Interface Parameters” window is correct.
[4] If you changed information, select [Set]. If the information is correct, select
[Cancel].
[5] To determine the next step, See “Completing the Installation” on Page 2–
22.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 8–9


SERVICE MANUAL

Fields and [Buttons] for the “Digital Interface Parameters”


Parameter Description Range
Pixels per Line The default number of pixels per line that the MIM expects the 1 - 1096
Imaging Device to send. This number will be used to determine
format validation.
Lines per Image The default number of lines per image that the MIM expects the 1 - 5120
Imaging Device to send. This number will be used to determine
format validation.
Parity The error-detection method of adding an even or odd number of 1’s None, Odd, or Even
to the binary word.
Line Timer The number of seconds that the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD 1 - 90
waits to receive a complete size or data packet from the Imaging
Device.
Sync Mode If “Auto Sync” is selected, the DIGITAL I/F BD will continue to No Sync, Auto Sync
acquire the image when a failure occurs during image acquisition.
If “No Sync” is selected, the DIGITAL I/F BD will not continue to
acquire the image when a failure occurs during image acquisition.
Pixel Depth The number of bits per pixel. 8, 10, 12

8–10 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Managing the Configuration

Section 9: Managing the Configuration

Introduction

Important
Use Section 9 to do the following procedures :
• To configure the Network Input for the DICOM PRINT SERVER and MIM 200 as a Print Server.
• To modify any of the following aspects of the configuration:
– Modality Store Feature
– Language and Date Format for the KEYPAD
– Time Zone
– Disk Management
• To save or restore the configuration.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 9–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Configuring the Network Input


[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure” / “Input” /
“Network”.

Caution
Changing parameters in this menu will take the system off-line.
[2] Select “Add”.

Important
Except to select the “Com Port,” do not change information in the “Network Input
Parameters” window.
[3] In the pull-down menu for “Com Port”. select the next available port.
[4] Select [OK].
[5] Advance to Page 9–3.

9–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Managing the Configuration

[6] Select [Close].


[7] Advance to Step 2 b on Page 9–4.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 9–3


SERVICE MANUAL

Configuring the KEYPAD for Date Format and Operating Language


MIM 50
[1] At the “Service Application” window, select “Configure/Input/Direct Connect”. For V_3.2, select “Configure/Input/Keypads”.

Caution
Changing these parameters will take the system off-line.
[2] At the “Configuration” window, select “Keypad” / “Modify” and select (for V_3.2, select in the Parameters System window):
(a) the correct “Date Format”
(b) the correct “Operating Language”
[3] To store this configuration, select “Set”. For V_3.2 select “OK” to store this information.

DICOM PRINT SERVER and MIM 200 Network Input


[1] At the “Service Application” window, select “Configure/Input/Network”.

Caution
Changing these parameters will take the system off-line.
[2] Does the “Network Input Configuration” display any parameters?

Note
You cannot modify parameters for a Conventional Keypad on the MIM 200.
(a) No, then select “Add” / “COM5” / “OK”:
(b) Yes, then select
• “Keypad” in the “Parameters” field
• “Modify”
• correct “Date Format” and the correct “Language”

[3] To store this configuration, select “Close”.

9–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Managing the Configuration

Changing the Time Zone


MIM 50 and MIM 200 with Conventional Keypads
[1] At the KEYPAD, press [Menu / Select].
[2] Press the down arrow until you highlight the “Service Menu”.
[3] Press [Menu / Select].
[4] Press the down arrow until you highlight “Machine Setup Menu”.
[5] Press [Menu / Select].
[6] Press the down arrow until you highlight “Select Time Zone”.
[7] Press [Menu / Select].
[8] Press either the up or down arrow to select the correct time zone.
[9] Press [Menu / Select].
[10] Press [Menu / Select] 4 times to return to the “Main Menu”.

MIM 100 and MIM 200 with Touchscreen Keypad


[1] At the “Acquisition” menu, select “Main Menu”.
[2] Select “Service” / “Set System Time” / “Change Time Zone”
[3] Press the up or down arrow to highlight the correct time zone.
[4] Select “Return” on the KEYPAD.
[5] At the “Set System Time” menu, select “Accept Changes”.
[6] Select [Return].
[7] To return to the “Acquisition” menu, select “Acquisition”.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 9–5


SERVICE MANUAL

Setting the Disk Management

Important

• The MIM and the LAPTOP must be energized. The LAPTOP must be connected to the MIM.
• Do not change the High Water mark of 75% and Low Water mark of 50% unless TSC instructs you to do so.
• The High and Low Water marks indicate the percent (%) of memory dedicated to image storage on the HARD DISK.
– High Water mark: The percent of memory full when software begins to delete the oldest image files.
– Low Water mark: The percent of memory full when the software stops deleting the oldest image files.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Disk Management”.
[2] Check that the settings are correct:
• High water mark: 75%
• Low water mark: 50%
[3] To store this configuration, select “Set”.

9–6 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Managing the Configuration

Saving the Configuration

Important
To save the configuration:
• Follow the instructions in Section 4 to energize the MIM and connect the LAPTOP.
• Keep the DISKETTE containing the configuration in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Save Configuration”.
[2] Insert the Configuration Diskette in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM.
[3] From the “Save Configuration Parameters” window, select “Start”.

Restoring the Configuration

Important
• Follow the instructions in Section 4 to energize the MIM and connect the LAPTOP.
• Keep the DISKETTE containing the configuration in the FLOPPY DRIVE.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Restore Configuration”.

Caution
Changing these parameters will take the system off-line.
[2] Insert the Configuration Diskette in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM.
[3] From the “Restore Configuration Parameters” window, select “Start” or “OK”.
[4] Do the procedure:
• For the MIM: “Acquiring a Test Image”
• For the DP Server: Make a test print.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 9–7


SERVICE MANUAL

Configuring the Modality Store Feature


[1] At the “Service Application” window, select “Configure” / “Input” / “Direct
Connect”.

Caution
Changing these parameters will take the system off-line.
[2] To take the system off-line, select “OK”.
[3] At the “Direct Connect Configuration” window, select “Keypad” / “Modify”
and press “OK” to display the “Parameters: Touchscreen Keypad” window.
[4] In the “Store Connection” panel, enable “Modality”.
[5] Select “OK”.

9–8 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Remote Access

Section 10: Remote Access


All service functionality available from the on-site LAPTOP is available remotely with use of an internal or external MODEM. The KEYPAD allows the user to change
the service access between local and remote. The KEYPAD automatically detects if an internal or external MODEM is connected and will not switch from local to remote
if a MODEM cannot be detected.

Installing the External MODEM

Important
The MODEM uses the same port as the SERVICE LAPTOP. The MODEM and LAPTOP cannot be connected at the same time.
The MODEM must be energized and connected to the COMPUTER before you advance to “Changing to Remote Access”.
[1] Connect:
(a) SERIAL CABLE from the MODEM SERIAL CONNECTOR to the SERVICE PORT on the COMPUTER.
(b) PHONE CABLE from the “JACK” PORT on the MODEM to the WALL JACK.
(c) MODEM POWER ADAPTER to the MODEM and AC WALL OUTLET.
[2] Energize the MODEM.

Important
• Use factory defaults for the External MODEM DIP SWITCH setting for the US Robotics Sportster 33.6 MODEM on the MIM 50, 100, and DP Server.
• A DIP SWITCH is “ON” when it is in the down position. A DIP SWITCH is “OFF” when it is in the up position.

SWITCH Factory Setting Function


1 Up Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Override
2 Up Verbalk/Numeric Result Codes
3 Down Result Code Display
4 Up Command Mode Local Echo Suppression
5 Down Auto Answer Suppression
6 Up Carrier Detect (CD) Override
7 Up Power-on and ATZ Reset Software Defaults
8 Down AT Command Set Recognition

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 10–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Changing to Remote Service Access


MIM 100 and MIM 200 with Touchscreen Keypad

Important
• When service access is configured for remote at the KEYPAD, the user cannot connect to the MIM with a LAPTOP until the service access is changed to local at
the KEYPAD and restarted.
• Changing the service access will not take effect until you de-energize and restart the MIM.
[1] At the “Main Menu” screen of the KEYPAD, press [Service].
[2] At the “Service” screen, press [Service Access].
[3] At the “Service Access” screen, press [Remote Access].
[4] Press [Return] to return to the “Service” screen.
[5] Press [Return] to return to the “Main Menu” screen.
[6] Press [Shutdown].
[7] Restart the MIM for the service access change to take effect.

MIM 50 and MIM 200 with Conventional Keypads

Important
When service access is configured for remote at the KEYPAD, the user cannot connect to the MIM with a LAPTOP until the service access is changed to local at the
KEYPAD and restarted. Changing the service access will not take effect until you de-energize and restart the MIM.
[1] At the Main screen, press [Menu / Select].
[2] Use the arrow buttons until you highlight the “Service Menu”.
[3] Press [Menu / Select].
[4] Select “Machine Setup”.
[5] Select “Service Access” to Remote.
[6] Press “Exit” twice to return to the “Aquisition Menu”.
[7] Select “System Shutdown”.
[8] Select “Confirm Shutdown”.
[9] When the “Safe to Shut off Unit Power” message appears, de-energize the unit.
[10] Wait at least one minute before you energize the unit.

10–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Displaying the Activity and Error Logs

Section 11: Displaying the Activity and Error Logs

Introduction
To display any of the logs, select the appropriate “Log” from the “Service Application” window. Or select the “Hot Key” from the “Tool Bar” of the “Service Application”
window. The letters in parentheses indicate the corresponding “Hot Key” on the Tool Bar of the “Service Application” window.
• Activity History (AH)
• Error History (EH)
• Error Frequency (EF)
The error codes are divided into several categories as indicated in the table below.To view all of the error codes and associated descriptions, select “Help/Topics” from
the “Service Application” window. Then open the desired Error Code listing from the “Topics” window.

Range Category Examples


0 - 599 General Errors Requested object or operation not found
600 - 999 Hardware Errors Buffer too small, Firmware invalid, Memory Test Error
1000 - 1999 Service Errors Requested diagnostic not found, DAD message error
2000 - 2999 Source Errors Command device not ready, Error while trying to read or write an image
3000 - 3999 Delivery Errors Page Full, Invalid Curve Shape, Failed sending image to PRINTER
4000 - 4999 Network Service Errors Problem in DICOM delivery, Incorrect information for MIM
5000 - 5999 Storage Errors Memory Access violation, DISK Low Water Mark not reached
6000 - 6999 Keypad Errors KEYPAD cannot send the message, KEYPAD failed a test

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 11–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Setting the Logging Levels

Important
The higher the level, the more information the log will record and the more likely that system performance will be slowed.

Level Indication Level Indication


0 The Log will not record any data. 5 Use this debug mode to troubleshoot the equipment.
2 Default. Use during normal operation. 5 Associated with the DP SERVER and SPOOLER/DICOM, use this level for Network
Services indicating debug modes for DICOM SCP in Release 3.0
3 For Autofilming in Release 3.0 Product 6 For source only, indicating the debug mode for Autofilming commands.
3 General: Debug modes for HIS/RIS communication in Rel. 3.0
[1] Select “Logs/Logging Levels” from the “Service Application” window.
[2] Make your selection or selections: Delivery, KEYPAD, Service, Network Service, Source, Storage.
[3] Select “Set”.

11–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Displaying the Activity and Error Logs

Displaying the Activity History Log

Important
You can set limits for the date and time range of the data you want to view in the “Activity History Log”.
[1] Select “AH” from the Tool Bar of the “Service Application” window.
[2] Make any necessary changes to the settings for “View From” or “View Through”.
[3] Select “OK”.
[4] At the prompt, select “View Log”.
[5] To save the Log, select “Save As”.
The Activity Log of the MIM software will contain the following detailed information when the logging levels are set appropriately:

Feature Subsystem Log Level


Autofilming communications Source 3
HIS/RIS communications General 3
DICOM SCP communications (DPS or DMI Spooler/DICOM) Network Services 5
Optical Interface communications with KELP (DPS) Delivery 5

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 11–3


SERVICE MANUAL

Activity History Log Example


The following example of the Activity History Log shows normal boot-up sequence on a MIM configured for Digital at Log Level 2.

Note

• When you change the Log Level on the MIM, it only affects the Activity History Log. See the example below for the Log Level location.
• To locate errors, an “E” is reported in the Log Level column. The “E” is usually followed by a message at Log Level, giving additional information about the error.

Log ClassID, Source File, Line


Date Time Level ObjectID Number Text Message
05/07/98 07:29:09:484 2 [0102,00000000] [PortManage-,675] - Found board: mimvdi0
05/07/98 07:29:09:444 2 [0102,00000000] [RNISystem.-,366] - MIM Application Version 2.0
05/07/98 07:29:09:464 2 [0102,00000000] [PortManage-,200] Mapped/Added PortID = 0x101
05/07/98 07:29:09:464 2 [0102,00000000] [PortManage-,200] Mapped/Added PortID = 0x103
05/07/98 07:29:09:474 2 [0102,00000000] [PortManage-,200] Mapped/Added PortID = 0x2102
05/07/98 07:29:09:474 2 [0102,00000000] [PortManage-,200] Mapped/Added PortID = 0x2102
05/07/98 07:29:09:484 2 [0102,00000000] [PortManage-,200] Mapped/Added PortID = 0x2304
05/07/98 07:29:09:404 2 [0102,00000000] [PortManage-,200] Mapped/Added PortID = 0x1305
05/07/98 07:29:09:514 2 [0102,00000000] [RNISystem.-,360] - System starting up on machine ENG-DI-2
05/07/98 07:29:09:514 2 [0102,00000000] [PortManage-,861] Dual-Channel DIGITAL Interface Card at Slot #16
05/07/98 07:29:09:514 2 [0102,00000000] [PortManage-,880] - Added Acquisition Port ID: 0x1211
05/07/98 07:29:10:435 2 [0102,00000000] [PortManage-,1469] -IFCard0Firmware Version 2.0
05/07/98 07:29:15:623 1 [Anonymous] [PortManage-,1684] -IF Card Firmware Driver Version 1.1.0
05/07/98 07:29:15:432 1 [Anonymous] [StorageCla-,706] - Compacting_DataBase
05/07/98 07:29:23:925 1 [Anonymous] [StorageClass,706] - Compacting DataBase. Please Wait (#5042)
05/07/98 07:29:35:001 1 [Anonymous] [StorageClass,769] - Compacting DataBase completed (#5043)
05/07/98 07:29:50:713 2 [6000,00256200] [StorageCla-,769] - Compact _DataBase_Complete
05/07/98 07:29:50:623 2 [4010,00256197] [keypad.cpp-,208] - Keypad Constructed!!
05/07/98 07:29:52:045 2 [2009,00256223] [KisManager-,119] - KisManager Activated
05/07/98 07:29:52:065 2 [2009,00256223] [imgcapdev.-,1956] - The Current System Temperature is 87 degrees F
05/07/98 07:29:52:035 2 [2009,00256223] [imgcapdev.-,1962] - RelayBoardRegisterTestsPasses
05/07/98 07:29:55:320 2 [6000,00256200] [DigImgCapD-,818] - CobraSelfTestsPassed
05/07/98 07:29:57:883 1 [Anonymous] [keypad.cpp-,491] - Keypad Activated!!

11–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Displaying the Activity and Error Logs

Log ClassID, Source File, Line


Date Time Level ObjectID Number Text Message
05/07/98 07:29:57:883 1 [Anonymous] [keypaddc.c-,1109] - AttachedtotheDiagnostician
05/07/98 07:29:00:998 2 [6000,00256200] [keypaddc.c-,1102] - Initialized the hint list
05/07/98 07:29:00:978 2 [6000,00256200] [keypad.cpp-,2049] - Keypad Revision#1.0.2

Displaying the Error History Log

Important
You can set the limits for the date and time range of the data you want to view in the “Error History Log”.
[1] Select “EH” from the Tool Bar of the “Service Application” window.
[2] Make any necessary changes to the settings for “View From” and “View Through”.
[3] In the “Retrieve” panel:
• Select either “All” or “MIM Application Only”.
• If you select “MIM Application Only,” select the range of error codes you want to display.
[4] In the “Severity” panel, select one or more of the following levels:
• Information (I)
• Warning (W)
• Fatal (E)
[5] Select “OK”.
[6] At the prompt, select “View Log”.

Note
The error will have the format 00000MMMM-NNN, where MMMM indicates the error code, and NNN indicates the source. MIM errors will have an NNN code of 010,
011, or 016. See the “Help Files” for other source descriptions and additional information.
[7] To save the Log, select “Save As”.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 11–5


SERVICE MANUAL

Example of the Error History Log


The following table is an example of the Error History Log, indicating a normal boot-up sequence.

Note
At the KEYPAD, press [SERVICE] / [VIEW ERROR LOGS]. Do not indicate a problem with the MIM.

I 0000020017-394 05/08/1998 13:36:41 The user ENG-VI-1\service has connected and has been successfully authenticated on port COM1.
E 0000007026-405 05/08/1998 13:34:16 The following boot-start or system-start driver(s) failed to load: Mouclass
I 0000000003-402 05/08/1998 13:33:38 User configuration data for parameter COM2 overriding firmware configuration data.
I 0000000003-402 05/08/1998 13:33:38 User configuration data for parameter COM4 overriding firmware configuration data.
I 0000000003-402 05/08/1998 13:33:38 User configuration data for parameter COM3 overriding firmware configuration data.
I 0000000003-402 05/08/1998 13:33:38 User configuration data for parameter COM1 overriding firmware configuration data.
E 0000004187-417 05/08/1998 13:33:31 Invalid address 40.16 was specified for adapter Elnk31\Parameters\TCPIP. This interface cannot be initialized.
E 0000007000-405 05/08/1998 13:33:31 The Cogent eMaster+ PCI Adapter Driver service failed to start due to the following error: %%31
E 0000007000-405 05/08/1998 13:33:31 The 3Com 3C90x Adapter Driver service failed to start due to the following error: %%31
I 0000006005-338 05/08/1998 13:33:27 The Event log service was started.
E 0000000026-347 05/08/1998 13:33:27 Exceeded the allowable number of retries (configurable via the registry) on device \Device\KeyboardPort0.
E 0000000026-347 05/08/1998 13:33:27 Exceeded the allowable number of retries (configurable via the registry) on device \Device\KeyboardPort0.
E 0000000026-347 05/08/1998 13:33:18 Exceeded the allowable number of retries (configurable via the registry) on device \Device\KeyboardPort0.
E 0000000026-347 05/08/1998 13:33:18 Exceeded the allowable number of retries (configurable via the registry) on device \Device\KeyboardPort0.
E 0000000019-347 05/08/1998 13:32:56 Could not set the keyboard typematic rate and delay.
W 0000000017-347 05/08/1998 13:32:56 The device sent an incorrect response(s) following a keyboard reset.
E 0000000020-347 05/08/1998 13:32:56 Could not set the keyboard indicator lights.
E 0000000007-364 05/08/1998 13:32:56 Could not locate the device object for one or more pointer port devices.
E 0000000015-347 05/08/1998 13:32:56 The keyboard reset failed.
W 0000002013-413 05/08/1998 13:28:08 The E: disk is at near capacity, you may need to delete some files.

11–6 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Displaying the Activity and Error Logs

Displaying the Error Frequency log


[1] Select “EH” from the Tool Bar of the “Service Application” window.
[2] In the “Retrieve” panel,
• Select either “All” or “MIM Application Only”.
• If you select “MIM Application Only”, select the range of error codes you want to display.
[3] Select “OK”.
[4] At the prompt, select “View Log”.
[5] To save the log, select “Save As”.

Clearing the Frequency Log

Important
Use this function after you make a repair to observe if the “Error Frequency Log” indicates the error again.
[1] Select “Clear Error Frequency Log” from the “Service Application” window.
[2] Select “Clear”.
[3] At the prompt ”Are you sure?” select “Yes”.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 11–7


SERVICE MANUAL

11–8 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagnostics

Section 12: Diagnostics

Beep Codes
Introduction
The Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) coordinates the start-up configuration of the COMPUTER. Since the MIM does not include a KEYBOARD and MONITOR, the
BIOS provides certain features:
• This section includes information that will assist you in diagnosing and troubleshooting the Wiring Diagrams, Activity and Error Log descriptions, BIOS beep codes,
and Troubleshooting the Power-On Sequence. For more diagnostic and troubleshooting information, open “Diagnostics” on the “Service Application” window.
• Listen to a number of beeps that provide feedback of error conditions during the Power-On Self Test (POST).
• Use the service LAPTOP to observe error messages and Power-On Self Test (POST) information.
• Use the service LAPTOP to operate the BIOS Setup Utility.
The modified beep code in the boot process set helps you isolate a malfunction to a hardware component.

MIM 100: Beep Codes


Beeps Malfunction and Cause Recommended Action Error Messages
0 SPEAKER malfunction: The MIM boots. Check the SPEAKER. None.
Power or CPU BD: The MIM does not boot. Repair the power malfunction or install a new CPU BOARD.
1 No malfunction: The BIOS successfully completed None. None.
initialization of all onboard and external devices.
2 CMOS: The boot process automatically stops. The LAPTOP prompts • “CMOS Settings Wrong”
• Configuration error you to do the AMIBIOS Setup. Advance to page 12–6 and do • “CMOS Checksum Bad”
• Checksum error the procedure “Configuring the BIOS and Interrupts”.
• “CMOS Battery Low”
• Battery low or malfunctioned • “CMOS Settings Wrong“
• System options not set
3 SIMM: Failure in first 640 KB of base memory. The system The boot process automatically stops. Install a new SIMM in None.
does not have any extended memory. BANK 0, SLOT 1.
4 CPU BOARD: The boot process automatically stops. Install a new CPU BD. • “Refresh Error“
• Refresh malfunction • “None“
• Processor Exception Interrupt Error • “Timer Error“
• Timer not Operational • “FDC Error”
• FLOPPY DRIVE CONTROLLER

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Beeps Malfunction and Cause Recommended Action Error Messages


5 HARD DRIVE: The boot process automatically stops. Repair the malfunction • “Pri. Master HDD Error“
• The busy signal of the HARD DRIVE CONTROLLER associated with the HARD DRIVE. • “Pri. Slave HDD Error“
did not go low in a finite period of time.
• “Sec. Master Error“
• The read/write did not verify.
• “Sec. Slave Error“
• Initialization failed
• Incorrect parameters
• Interrupt was expected or data request signal did not
arrive within a finite period of time.
6 VIDEO ADAPTER BOARD: Either the system video The boot process automatically stops. Repair the malfunction None.
adapter is missing or the display memory had a associated with the VIDEO ADAPTER BOARD.
malfunction associated with a read/write command.
7 FLOPPY DRIVE: Continue to boot from the HARD DRIVE. “A or B: Drive Error“
• Incorrect Type
• A seek failure occurred during POST.

MIM 100 with Micro Industries Board: Beep Codes


Beeps Malfunction and Cause Recommended Action Error Messages
0 SPEAKER malfunction: The MIM boots. Check the SPEAKER. None.
Power or CPU BD: The MIM does not boot. Repair the power malfunction or install a new CPU BOARD.
1 No malfunction: The BIOS successfully completed None. None.
initialization of all onboard and external devices.
2 CMOS: The boot process automatically stops. The LAPTOP prompts • “CMOS Settings Wrong”
• Configuration error you to do the AMIBIOS Setup. Advance to page 12–6 and do • “CMOS Checksum Bad”
• Checksum error the procedure “Configuring the BIOS and Interrupts”.
• “CMOS Battery Low”
• Battery low or malfunctioned • “CMOS Settings Wrong“
• System options not set
3 SIMM: Failure in first 640 KB of base memory. The system The boot process automatically stops. Install a new SIMM in None.
does not have any extended memory. BANK 0, SLOT 1.

12–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagnostics

Beeps Malfunction and Cause Recommended Action Error Messages


4 CPU BOARD: The boot process automatically stops. Install a new CPU BD. • “Refresh Error“
• Refresh malfunction • “None“
• Processor Exception Interrupt Error • “Timer Error“
• Timer not Operational • “FDC Error”
• FLOPPY DRIVE CONTROLLER
5 HARD DRIVE: The boot process automatically stops. Repair the malfunction • “Pri. Master HDD Error“
• The busy signal of the HARD DRIVE CONTROLLER associated with the HARD DRIVE. • “Pri. Slave HDD Error“
did not go low in a finite period of time.
• “Sec. Master Error“
• The read/write did not verify.
• “Sec. Slave Error“
• Initialization failed
• Incorrect parameters
• Interrupt was expected or data request signal did not
arrive within a finite period of time.
6 VIDEO ADAPTER BOARD: Either the system video The boot process automatically stops. Repair the malfunction None.
adapter is missing or the display memory had a associated with the VIDEO ADAPTER BOARD.
malfunction associated with a read/write command.
7 FLOPPY DRIVE: Continue to boot from the HARD DRIVE. “A or B: Drive Error“
• Incorrect Type
• A seek failure occurred during POST.

MIM 200: Beep Codes


Beeps Malfunction and Cause Recommended Action Error Messages
0 SPEAKER malfunction: The MIM boots. Check the SPEAKER. None.
Power or CPU BD: The MIM does not boot. Repair the power malfunction or install a new CPU BOARD.
1 No malfunction: The BIOS successfully completed None. None.
initialization of all onboard and external devices.
2 CMOS: The boot process automatically stops. The LAPTOP prompts • “CMOS Settings Wrong”
• Configuration error you to do the AMIBIOS Setup. Advance to page 12–6 and do • “CMOS Checksum Bad”
• Checksum error the procedure “Configuring the BIOS and Interrupts”.
• “CMOS Battery Low”
• Battery low or malfunctioned • “CMOS Settings Wrong“
• System options not set

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–3


SERVICE MANUAL

Beeps Malfunction and Cause Recommended Action Error Messages


3 SIMM: Failure in first 640 KB of base memory. The system The boot process automatically stops. Install a new SIMM in None.
does not have any extended memory. BANK 0, SLOT 1.
4 CPU BOARD: The boot process automatically stops. Install a new CPU BD. • “Refresh Error“
• Refresh malfunction • “None“
• Processor Exception Interrupt Error • “Timer Error“
• Timer not Operational • “FDC Error”
• FLOPPY DRIVE CONTROLLER
5 HARD DRIVE: The boot process automatically stops. Repair the malfunction • “Pri. Master HDD Error“
• The busy signal of the HARD DRIVE CONTROLLER associated with the HARD DRIVE. • “Pri. Slave HDD Error“
did not go low in a finite period of time.
• “Sec. Master Error“
• The read/write did not verify.
• “Sec. Slave Error“
• Initialization failed
• Incorrect parameters
• Interrupt was expected or data request signal did not
arrive within a finite period of time.
6 VIDEO ADAPTER BOARD: Either the system video The boot process automatically stops. Repair the malfunction None.
adapter is missing or the display memory had a associated with the VIDEO ADAPTER BOARD.
malfunction associated with a read/write command.
7 FLOPPY DRIVE: Continue to boot from the HARD DRIVE. “A or B: Drive Error“
• Incorrect Type
• A seek failure occurred during POST.

MIM 50, DICOM PRINT SERVER, and SPOOLER: Beep Codes


Beep Code Malfunction Remedy
1-1-3 CMOS write/read failure Replace the unit.
1-1-4 BIOS ROM checksum failure Replace the unit.
1-2-1 Programmable interval timer test failure Replace the unit.
1-2-2 DMA initialization failure Replace the unit.
1-2-3 DMA page resgister write/read test failure Replace the unit.
1-2-4 RAM refresh verification failure Replace the unit.
1-3-1 First 64K RAM test failure Replace the unit.
1-3-2 First 64K RAM parity test failure Replace the unit.

12–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagnostics

Beep Code Malfunction Remedy


2-1-1 Secondary DMA register test in progress or failure Replace the unit.
2-1-2 Primary DMA register test in progress or failure Replace the unit.
2-1-3 Primary interrupt mask register test failure Replace the unit.
2-1-4 Secondary interrupt mask register test failure Replace the unit.
2-2-2 Keyboard controller test failure Replace the unit.
2-3-2 Screen memory test in progress or failure Replace the unit.
2-3-3 Screen retrace tests in progress or failure Replace the unit.
3-1-1 Timer tick interrupt test failure Replace the unit.
3-1-2 Interval timer channel 2 test failure Replace the unit.
3-1-4 Time-of-day clock test failure Replace the unit.
3-2-4 Comparing CMOS memory size against actual Replace the unit.
3-3-1 Memory size mismatch occurred Replace the unit.

Note
• One beep occurs when you first energize the product.
• The beep codes occur in a series of 3 sets of beeps as indicated under the first column of the table.
• Normal beep tones occurring when the equipment is energized consists of one beep followed by a pause, followed by 3 beeps, which may be followed by a pause
and 2 more beeps.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–5


SERVICE MANUAL

Configuring the BIOS and Interrupts


MIM 100

Important
• Do this procedure immediately after you install a new CPU BOARD.
• The configuration of the BIOS settings of the IDE DRIVE depends on the model of the HARD DRIVE and the version of MIM Application software.
[1] De-energize the MIM.
[2] Use the LAPTOP to display the “ProComm Plus” utility.

Important
The ProComm Plus utility must be configured to communicate with the MIM BIOS:
• 19,200 baud
• 8 data bits
• No parity
• 1 stop bit
• Terminal = VT100
In the next step, do not release the SPACE BAR until the LAPTOP begins to display information about the BIOS.
[3] At the same time, hold down the SPACE BAR of the LAPTOP and energize the MIM.
[4] When the LAPTOP begins to display the information for the BIOS, press [Del] on the LAPTOP.

Important
The LAPTOP completes counting the memory and displays the main menu for the BIOS Setup utility.
Use [Tab] or [Back Space] on the LAPTOP to highlight a choice in the main menu.
[5] Select “Auto Configuration with Optimal Settings” and press [Enter].
[6] At the prompt, “Load High Performance with Optimal Settings”, select “Y” and press [Enter].
[7] When the LAPTOP displays the main menu again, select “Auto-Detect Hard Disks”, and press [Enter].
[8] At the “Standard CMOS Setup” screen, check that the screen displays the correct time and date settings. If the settings are not correct:
(a) Select the incorrect entry
(b) On the LAPTOP, use the [Shift] [+] keys to increase the value or the [-] key to decrease the value.

12–6 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagnostics

Settings of the Seagate Medalist IDE DRIVES


LBA BLK PIO 32-bit
Model Item Type Size Cyln. Head WPcom Sec Mode Mode Mode Mode
ST31720A (1.7 GB) Pri. Master User 1626 3305 16 65535 63 On On 4 Off
Pro 4520 ST34520A (4.5 GB) Pri. Master User 4341 9406 15 65535 63 On On 4 Off
4321 ST34321A (4.3 GB) Pri. Master User 4103 8894 15 65535 63 On On 4 Off
ST34310A (4.3 GB) Pri. Master User 4111 8354 16 65535 63 On On 4 Off

Custom Settings of the Seagate Medalist Pro 4520 Model ST34520A IDE DRIVE: Cannot “Auto Detect”
LBA BLK PIO 32-bit
Model Item Type Size Cyln. Head WPcom Sec Mode Mode Mode Mode
Pro 4520 ST34520A (4.5 GB) Pri. Master User 1626 3305 16 65535 63 On On 4 Off

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–7


SERVICE MANUAL

Descriptions of Options for the BIOS Setup


Menu Use to: Important
Main Set up and modify the basic options; for example, Observe the labels on the HARD DRIVE for the Model and the MIM Application.
time, date, FLOPPY DRIVE, and HARD DRIVE. The settings are for MIM 100, MIM 100NR and MIM 100 with Micro Industries
Advanced Modify advanced features such as peripheral Motherboard. The Micro Industries Motherboard detects the settings
configuration and advanced chipset configuration. automatically.
Security Specify a password to limit access to the system. [9] Check that the BIOS settings of the IDE DRIVE match the values in Table
or Table . See the labels on the HARD DRIVE.
Exit Save or discard changes.
Sub Menu Use to: [10] If the BIOS settings are incorrect, change the values to the correct values.
HARD DRIVE Configure the HARD DRIVE. [11] Press [Esc] to exit the “Standard CMOS Setup”.
Configuration
Boot options Modify options for the system to boot up, such as Important
the boot sequence. • For Release Version 3.x only, do Steps 12 and 13.
Peripheral Configuration Modify options for the SERIAL PORTS, the • For V_1.X and V_2.X, advance to Step 14.
PARALLEL PORT, and the HARD DRIVE
[12] Select “PCI/Plug and Play Setup” and press [Enter].
interfaces.
[13] Select “PCI IDE Busmaster” and change the setting to “Enabled”. Use the
Advanced Chipset Modify options for memory and system buses.
[+] key to change the setting.
Configuration
Power Management Modify options for the Advanced Power [14] Select “Save Settings and Exit”, and press [Enter].
Configuration Management (APM) options. [15] At the prompt, “Save current settings and exit (Y/N)?)”, select “Y” and press
Plug-and-Play Modify options for the system’s plug-and play [Enter].
Configuration capabilities. Note
The MIM reboots automatically.

MIM 100 With Micro Industries Motherboard


The following list contains the custom settings from the original defaults that are supplied by Micro Industries. Production versions of the BIOS V_1.0 Date: 3/13/00
should have these settings from the factory.
• Under Advanced / Disable “Legacy USB Support”
• Under Advanced / I/O Device Configuration / Disable “Parallel Port”
• Under Advanced / Select “Other” for Large Disk Access Mode
• Under Advanced / Advanced Chipset Control / Select “4MB” for Graphics Aperture
• Under Boot / Disable “QuickBoot Mode”
• Under Boot / Select “Hard Drive, Diskette Drive, ATAPI CD-ROM Drive, Network Boot” as Boot Device Priority

12–8 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagnostics

MIM 50 and DICOM PRINT SERVER


Use the following Keys to make selection in the “Configuration / Setup To check the BIOS, you will need a keyboard and monitor. Access the BIOS by
Utility” Menu pressing [F1] when the computer prompts you to do so at which time the monitor
Key Function will display the “Configuration/Setup Utility” menu. See Table for instructions on
how to use the “Configuration / Setup Utility” menu. See Table for information on
Up and Moves between menu items until you highlight
the specific settings.
Down Arrows the correct selection.
Left and Display and toggle between selections.
Right Arrows Configuration / Setup Utility
[Enter] Selects the highlighted menu item. Select Option:
[Esc] Exits from the menu. • System Summary
[+] Increments the value of a setting. • Product Data
[-] Decrements the value of a setting. • Devices and I/O Ports
[F1] Displays “Help” for an item.
• Start Options
[F9] Restores the previous active setting.
• Date and Time
[F10] Restores the default setting.
• System Security
• Advanced Setup
• ISA Legacy Resource
• Power Management
Save Settings
Restore Settings
Load Defaut Settings
Exit Setup

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–9


SERVICE MANUAL

Specific Settings of the “Configuration / Setup Utility” Menu: From the “Configuration/Setup Utility” Menu do the following:

1 Select Devices and I/O Ports Select not installed for the Mouse.
2 Select Devices and I/O Ports/IDE Drives Setup/IDE Hard Disk Drive 0 Disable IDE Read Prefetch.
3 Select Devices and I/O Ports/IDE Drives Setup/IDE Hard Disk Drive 0 Disable IDE Read Prefetch.
4 Select Devices and I/O Ports/Audio Setup Disable “Audio Support”
5 Select Devices and I/O Ports/Ethernet Setup Disable “Alert on LAN”
6 Select Devices and I/O Ports/Ethernet Setup Disable “Network Boot”
7 Select Devices and I/O Ports/USB Setup Disable “USB Keyboard/Mouse Support”
8 Select Start Options/Startup Sequence Select “Hard Disk 0” as Primary/Second Startup Device.
9 Select Start Options/Startup Sequence Select “Disabled” as Primary/Second Startup Device.
10 Select Start Options/Startup Sequence Select “Disabled” as Automatic Power On Startup Sequence
11 Select Start Options/Startup Sequence Select “Primary” as Error Startup Sequence
12 Select Start Options Enable “Keyboardless Operation Mode”
13 Select Advanced Setup/PCI Control Enable “Network Adapters”
14 Select Advanced Setup/PCI Control Enable “Display Adapters”
15 Select Power Management Disable “ACPI BIOS Mode”

12–10 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagnostics

DICOM PRINT SERVER


Use the following Keys to make selection in the “Configuration / Setup To check the BIOS, you will need a keyboard and monitor. Access the BIOS by
Utility” Menu pressing [F1] when the computer prompts you to do so at which time the monitor
Key Function will display the “Configuration/Setup Utility” menu. See the Table to the left for
instructions on how to use the “Configuration / Setup Utility” menu. See “Specific
Up and Moves between menu items until you highlight
Settings of the Configuration / Setup Utility” on Page 12–10
Down Arrows the correct selection.
Left and Display and toggle between selections.
Right Arrows Configuration / Setup Utility
[Enter] Selects the highlighted menu item. Select Option:
[Esc] Exits from the menu. • System Summary
[+] Increments the value of a setting. • Product Data
[-] Decrements the value of a setting. • Devices and I/O Ports
[F1] Displays “Help” for an item.
• Start Options
[F9] Restores the previous active setting.
• Date and Time
[F10] Restores the default setting.
• System Security
• Advanced Setup
• ISA Legacy Resource
• Power Management
Save Settings
Restore Settings
Load Defaut Settings
Exit Setup

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–11


SERVICE MANUAL

Specific Settings of the “Configuration / Setup Utility” Menu:

1 Select Devices and I/O Ports Select not installed for the Mouse.
2 Select Devices and I/O Ports/IDE Drives Setup/IDE Hard Disk Drive 0 Disable IDE Read Prefetch.
3 Select Devices and I/O Ports/IDE Drives Setup/IDE Hard Disk Drive 0 Disable IDE Read Prefetch.
4 Select Devices and I/O Ports/Audio Setup Disable “Audio Support”
5 Select Devices and I/O Ports/Ethernet Setup Disable “Alert on LAN”
6 Select Devices and I/O Ports/Ethernet Setup Disable “Network Boot”
7 Select Devices and I/O Ports/USB Setup Disable “USB Keyboard/Mouse Support”
8 Select Start Options/Startup Sequence Select “Hard Disk 0” as Primary/Second Startup Device.
9 Select Start Options/Startup Sequence Select “Disabled” as Primary/Second Startup Device.
10 Select Start Options/Startup Sequence Select “Disabled” as Automatic Power On Startup Sequence
11 Select Start Options/Startup Sequence Select “Primary” as Error Startup Sequence
12 Select Start Options Enable “Keyboardless Operation Mode”
13 Select Advanced Setup/PCI Control Enable “Network Adapters”
14 Select Advanced Setup/PCI Control Enable “Display Adapters”
15 Select Power Management Disable “ACPI BIOS Mode”

12–12 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagnostics

Troubleshooting the MIM 100


MIM 100: Troubleshooting the Power-On Sequence
Malfunction Solution
The LED does not 1. Check the AC Power:
illuminate when the MIM • The POWER CORD is correctly seated in an approved wall outlet
energizes.
• Check the continuity of the POWER CORD
• The AC Power outlet is correct at the wall outlet
2. Check the continuity of the FUSES in the AC POWER SWITCH.
3. Check for 2 V DC at the LED CONNECTOR. If correct, then check all outputs of the POWER SUPPLY.
4. Install a new LED.
The FAN does not operate 1. Check the POWER SUPPLY:
when the MIM energizes. • 12 V DC between P2-7 and P2-5 on the POWER SUPPLY
• 12 V DC at the FAN CONNECTOR
2. Install a new FAN.
The KEYPAD does not 1. Check the KEYPAD CABLE:
display the ds logo when • Correctly seated in PORT on the BULKHEAD of the MIM
the MIM energizes.
• Continuity of the KEYBOARD CABLE
2. Check for the DC voltages at the POWER SUPPLY.
3. Check that the:
• KEYBOARD HARNESS is correctly seated on the RELAY BD
• RIBBON CABLE for the RS422 I/F is correctly seated
4. Check that 12 Volt connector on DIGITAL or VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD is installed correctly.
5. Install a new RELAY BOARD.
6. Install a new KEYPAD.
7. Install a new SERIAL BOARD.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–13


SERVICE MANUAL

Malfunction Solution
The SPEAKER does not 1. If the SPEAKER does not beep once or sounds more than one beep, see page 12–1.
make one beep tone when 2. Check that the SPEAKER is correctly connected to the CPU BOARD.
the MIM energizes.
3. Check the POWER SUPPLY:
• All outputs of the POWER SUPPLY are correct
• CONNECTORS P2, P3 are correctly seated on the CPU BOARD
4. Reseat the SIMMs. If necessary, install a new SIMM in BANK 0, SLOT 1.
5. Reseat the BIOS. If necessary, install a new BIOS.
6. Install a new CPU BOARD.
The KEYPAD does not 1. Use the LAPTOP to check that the “CPU Setup and Configuration” information is correct. After you exit
display the “Acquisition” the ROM Setup Program, the MIM automatically reboots and reloads the system.
screen. 2. Check that the settings of the SWITCH and JUMPERS are correct on the RS 422 SERIAL BOARD.
3. Check that the software configuration files are correct.
4. Install the System Software and configure the MIM.

Diagnostics for the OPTICAL INTERFACE (OI) BOARDS

Important
• Executing diagnostics on either the DP SERVER OI or CPOI BOARDS interrupts communication, terminating transmission of images to the LASER PRINTER.
Transmission will resume when the diagnostic completes execution.
• Execute the diagnostic for the DP SERVER before you execute the diagnostic for the CPOI. The communication between the DP SERVER and the CPOI must be
functioning correctly before the diagnostic for the CPOI will successfully pass the test.
• Before you decide to install a replacement CPOI, check that the following equipment operates correctly:
– FIBER OPTIC CABLE between the DP SERVER and the DISTRIBUTION BAORD Ay
– FIBER OPTIC PASS THROUGH CONNECTOR at the DISTRIBUTION BOARD Ay
– Internal FIBER OPTIC CABLE between the DISTRIBUTION BOARD Ay and the CPOI
• The diagnostic tests for the CPOI include the following tests:
– Registers and interrupts
– Transmitters and receivers
– Memory

12–14 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagnostics

Troubleshooting the CPOI


Enter selection -->
CES PORT TEST--------PASSED
DRAM INTEGRITY TEST- PASSED
Important
DRAM REFRESH TEST--- PASSED • The CPOI is a “Plug and Play” device. No configuration is necessary. The DP
ROM SUMCHECK TEST--- PASSED SERVER downloads all setup information to the CPOI.
VICO68 RESET TEST--- PASSED
NVSRAM BATTTERY TEST- PASSED • The LAPTOP connects to the CPOI at the 25 PIN SERVICE CONNECTOR
NVSRAM INTEGRITY TEST-PASSED of the DISTRIBUTION BOARD AY on the back of the LASER PRINTER.
VICO69 INITIALIZATION PASSED
• Connection setup to the LAPTOP for a CP interface is a Null Serial
CPNI Environment Ver 1.0 Connection: 9600 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and full duplex.
Current Date/Time ==> 5/13/1999 10:52:00 [1] Connect the LAPTOP to the CPOI.
Valid Application in FLASH <GO>..copied to RAM

CPOI Application - CkSum 003456D8 OK


CPOI NVRAM- OK
Caution
SPURIOUS INTERRUPTS DETECTED! Count=2695692801 Before you return operation of the DP SERVER to the customer, de-energize and
CPOI Starting-Date and Time=>5/13/1999 9:41:34 energize the LASER PRINTER. The soft boot process might result in incorrectly
Start CPOI command handler...Complete! terminated operations in the LASER PRINTER. Use the RESET on the front of
Previous CPCP node:6 entry:1..MIM issue START!
the CPOI to soft boot the CPOI without de-energizing the LASER PRINTER.
Start CPOI driver...Complete!
[2] Energize or Reset the LASER PRINTER. See the example screen at left.
CPOI Ver 1.2 [Boot PROM Ver. 1.0]

- UTILITIES MENU - Important


1 Get Current Date & Time
If the screen data does not match the data indicated in the example screen at left,
3 CPCP Buffer Address See “Troubleshooting the CPOI” on Page 12–20.
4 CPCP Buffer Tables [3] Check that the Date /TIme of the CPOI and the DP SERVER match:
6 Debug Utilities (Trace: 8000) • Select item 1 from the “Utilities Menu.”
7 Get OI Firmware Revisions
8 Run All CPOI Diagnostic Tests
• At the DISPLAY KEYPAD of the DP SERVER, select “Menu” / “Service
9 Set Current Date & Time Menu” / “Machine Setup” / “Set Date/Time”

CPOI Status: IDLE


***Spurious interrupts: Total=2695692801
Current=0***

Enter selection --> 1

Current PSOS Date & Time= >5/13/1999


9:41:42
Reset PSOS to RTC Date&Time=>5/13/1999
9:41:43

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–15


SERVICE MANUAL

CPOI Ver 1.2 [Boot PROM Ver. 1.0]

UTILITIES MENU
Important
1 Get Current Date & Time If the screen data does not match the data indicated in the example screen at left,
See “Troubleshooting the CPOI” on Page 12–20.
3 CPCP Buffer Address
4 CPCP Buffer Tables [4] To determine the interface for which the CPOI is configured, select item 3.
The LAPTOP will display the “CPCP Anchor”.
6 Debug Utilities (Trace: 8000)
7 Get OI Firmware Revisions Note
8 Run All CPOI Diagnostic Tests • 1120 LASER PRINTER: CPCP Anchor 0XF0000
9 Set Current Date & Time
• 2180 LASER PRINTER: CPCP Anchor 0X00000
CPOI Status: IDLE
[5] To determine if the interface SLOTS and addresses are correctly assigned,
***Spurious interrupts: Total=2695692801
Current=0*** select item 4 from the “Utilities Menu.”

Enter selection --> 3


Important
CPCP Buffer Tables See the example screen on the next page:
-- CPCP Anchor: 0XF0000
• The “CPCP Buffer Table” data depends on the model of LASER PRINTER.
In the “ow nr” column the address “00” is assigned to the LASER PRINTER:
– 2180 LASER PRINTER: 6 addresses
CPOI Ver 1.2 [Boot PROM Ver. 1.0]
– 1120 LASER PRINTER: 4 addresses
UTILITIES MENU • Maximum no. of entries in the “CPCP Buffer Table”:
1 Get Current Date & Time
– 16 addresses for the 1120 LASER PRINTER
3 CPCP Buffer Address
– 22 addresses for the 2180 LASER PRINTER
4 CPCP Buffer Tables
• All CP interfaces except the CPOI are assigned 2 addresses.
6 Debug Utilities (Trace: 8000)
7 Get OI Firmware Revisions • The CPOI is assigned 1 address.
8 Run All CPOI Diagnostic Tests • The Network Interface is assigned 6 addresses.
9 Set Current Date & Time
• In the “ow nr” column of the CPCP Buffer Table on the next page:
CPOI Status: IDLE
***Spurious interrupts: Total=2695692801
– Node Id 00: 2180 LASER PRINTER
Current=0*** – Node Id 01: CPVI
Enter selection --> 4 – Node Id 06: CPOI
• Address ABCD1234 indicates an unassigned Node.
• The TSC might request this data to resolve node conflicts on the VMEbus.

12–16 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagnostics

==================================================================================================
CPCP Global Memory in 2180
==================================================================================================
==================================================================================================
CPCP Buffer Table Anchor
==================================================================================================
Addr. Buftbl * BT_Lock Valid_Anchor BT_Vers.
00000000 0003F980 CD000000 4B454350(‘KECP’) 32324220(‘22B’)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CPCP NodeAv1[]
Node 0 Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 Node 5 Node 6 Node 7
EA000000 EA000000 ABCD1234 ABCD1234 ABCD1234 ABCD1234 EA000000 ABCD1234
==================================================================================================
CPCP Buffer Table Entries
==================================================================================================
ow in ow sn -----int_owner----- -----ack_sender----
Addr. nd us nr dr bufaddr bytes seq mbx_base iv ip type mxb_base iv ip type
00 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F980 01 01 00 01 0003EE80 000F 00C8 00002000 00 00 0001 00002100 00 00 0001
01 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F99C 01 01 00 06 0003EF00 000F 0003 00002000 01 00 0001 00002600 00 00 0001
02 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F9B8 01 00 00 FF 0003EF80 0000 0000 00002000 02 00 0001 4350444C 43 50 444C
03 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F9D4 01 00 00 FF 0003F000 0000 0000 00002000 03 00 0001 4350444C 43 50 444C
04 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F9F0 01 00 00 FF 0003F080 0000 0000 00002000 04 00 0001 4350444C 43 50 444C
05 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F99C 01 00 00 FF 0003F100 0000 0000 00002000 05 00 0001 4350444C 43 50 444C
06 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F99C 01 01 01 00 0003F180 000F 00CB 00002100 00 00 0001 00002000 00 00 0001
07 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F99C 01 00 01 FF 0003F200 0000 0000 00002100 01 00 0001 4350444C 43 50 444C
08 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0003F99C 01 01 06 00 0003F280 000F 0005 00002600 00 00 0001 00002000 00 00 0001

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–17


SERVICE MANUAL

CPOI Ver 1.2 [Boot PROM Ver. 1.0]

UTILITIES MENU
Important
1 Get Current Date & Time The Debug Utilities are password protected and for use in program debugging
only. To execute item 6 “Debug Utilities” you must make a call to the TSC for the
3 CPCP Buffer Address password and instructions.
4 CPCP Buffer Tables
[6] To determine the “MIM IO firmware version,” select item 7. The version must
6 Debug Utilities (Trace: 8000) match the version displayed in “Service Tracking Information.”
7 Get OI Firmware Revisions See Page 5–1.
8 Run All CPOI Diagnostic Tests
9 Set Current Date & Time

CPOI Status: IDLE


***Spurious interrupts: Total=2695692801
Current=0***

Enter selection --> 7

CPOI Test -Get OI Revisions-4/29/1999 10:53:48


CPOI SEND_BOOTCODE_REVISION requsests
CPOI Boot Code Rev: 1.0.4
MIMOI Boot Code Rev: 1.0.4

CPOI SEND_APPCODE_REVISION requests


CPOI App Code Rev: 1.0.4
MIMOI App Code Rev: 1.0.4

12–18 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagnostics

CPOI Ver 1.2 [Boot PROM Ver. 1.0] [7] To execute the “CPOI and MIM OI onboard diagnostics,” select item 8.

UTILITIES MENU
1 Get Current Date & Time Caution
Before you return operation of the DP SERVER to the customer, de-energize and
3 CPCP Buffer Address
4 CPCP Buffer Tables
energize the LASER PRINTER. The soft boot process might result in incorrectly
terminated operations in the LASER PRINTER.Use the RESET on the front of the
6 Debug Utilities (Trace: 8000) CPOI to soft boot the CPOI without de-energizing the LASER PRINTER.
7 Get OI Firmware Revisions
8 Run All CPOI Diagnostic Tests
[8] If you are done executing the diagnostics, de-energize and energize the
9 Set Current Date & Time LASER PRINTER.
[9] Return operation of the DP SERVER to the customer.
CPOI Status: IDLE
***Spurious interrupts: Total=2695692801
Current=0***

Enter selection --> 8

CPOI Diagnostic-Run All Tests-4/29/1999 10:53:


CPOI RUN_DIAGNOSTIC request

CPOI Diag. Result command:X10001


- Tests run: 23
- All tests passed: - 4/29/1999 10:54:11

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–19


SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting the CPOI


Indication Action
One or more of the 8 boot-up tests fail. Reseat the DAUGHTER BD of the CPOI and reboot. If necessary, install a new CPOI.
“ChSum” not OK.
CPCP node does not match node configured in Page 5–6. Execute item 3 in the “Utilities Menu.” If the “Anchor” is incorrect, see the indication below.
“Date/Time” of the CPOI and the DP SERVER do not match. Execute item 8 in the “Utilities Menu.” Do not execute item 9 unless the TSC instructs you.
Version < “CPOI Ver 1.2” The version must be ³ 1.2. Do Mod 1.
“Spurious interrupts” counts are display for your information Mod 49 must be installed for the 2180 LASER PRINTER. To reset to zero execute [Ctrl] kill.
Incorrect “Anchor” Configure the Destination: See Page 5–6. If the “Anchor” remains incorrect, execute item 8 in the
“Utilities Menu.” If the diagnostic does not indicate a malfunction of the MIM OI and the FIBEROPTIC
CABLE, then check that the other CP interfaces on the VMEbus operate correctly. If necessary,
install a new CPOI.
The data in the “CPCP Buffer Table” does not match the Select item 8 in the “Utilities Menu” to execute the “CPOI and MIM onboard diagnostics.” See Page
hardware installed. 12–14. Check that the configuration of all interfaces are correct, including Node ID. Troubleshoot
The MIM OI firmware version does not match the version hardware on the VMEbus of the LASER PRINTER.
displayed in “Service Tracking Information”.

12–20 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagnostics

Store and Print a Test Image


Use this feature to check equipment performance, investigate image data transfer, or troubleshoot network malfunctions.

MIM 100
[1] At the “Main Menu” of the TOUCH KEYPAD, select [Service], then select [Store & Print Test Image].
[2] Select the pattern that you want to display:
• SMPTE
• Vertical Gray
• Horizontal Gray
• Flat Field
• Pixel On/Off
• Continuous Tone
• Checkerboard
[3] Select the image size:
• 512 x 512
• 1024 x 1024
• 1280 x 1024
[4] Select the [Pixel Depth]:
• 8
• 10
• 12
[5] To print the test image, select [Execute Print].

MIM 50, MIM 200, DICOM PRINT SERVER, SPOOLER


[1] At the DISPLAY KEYPAD or PRINTING KEYPAD, select “Menu” / “Diagnostics Menu” / “Test Print Menu”.
For the MIM 200, select “Network Input” / “Menu” / “Service Menu” / “Diagnostics Menu” / “Test Print Menu”.
[2] For the MIM 50, MIM 200 or DICOM PRINT SERVER, select “Greyscale Print”.

Note
For instructions regarding all other choices in the menu, including choices for the SPOOLER, please see the corresponding User’s Guide: Page 1–4.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–21


SERVICE MANUAL

From the LAPTOP

Note
Use the System Diagnostics menu from the Service Application to print a test
image from any of the MIM Products.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application,” select “Diagnostics” / “System”.
[2] Deselect the selection in the “System Diagnostics” dialog window that you
do not want to execute.
[3] Select [Run].

12–22 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagnostics

Hardware
S150 VIDEO BOARD

Important
If Modality Capture Tests fail when running Video diagnostics, the VIDEO BOARD is not necessarily defective. Check the following items:
• The Input Video is not present
• The parameters entered in the MIM do not match the parameters for the Modality or are not correct
• The parameters in MIM are not correct
The diagnostics for the VIDEO BOARD include the following tests:
• General Tests
• Memory Tests
• Modality Capture Tests
• Simulated Capture Tests

S60 VIDEO BOARD

Important
If Modality Capture Tests fail when running Video diagnostics, the VIDEO BOARD is not necessarily defective. Check the following items:
• The Input Video is not present
• The parameters entered in the MIM do not match the parameters for the Modality or are not correct
• The parameters in MIM are not correct
The diagnostics for the VIDEO BOARD include the following tests:
• General Tests
• Memory Tests
• Simulated Capture Tests

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–23


SERVICE MANUAL

DIGITAL BOARD

Important
The Opto-Isolator test fails if the OPTO-ISOLATOR BOARD is not installed.The diagnostics for the DIGITAL BOARD include the following tests:
• Register & Interrupt Tests
• FIFO & RAM Tests
• Modality Interface Tests
• Opto-Isolator

RELAY BOARD of the MIM 100


The diagnostics for the RELAY BOARD include:
• A/D
• Control Register
• System Temperature

Network Malfunctions
MIM 100 with Software V_2.1 or Less
Use “Ping” to check that the MIM can correctly communicate with the destination.

MIM 50, MIM 200, or MIM 100 with V_3.x


Use the following tests:
• “Ping” to check that the MIM can correctly communicate with the destination.
• DICOM Echo

DICOM PRINT SERVER


Use the following tests:
• “Ping” to check that the MIM can correctly communicate with the destination.
• DICOM Echo

12–24 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagnostics

SPOOLER: Loopback Test


[1] Connect the LOOPBACK CONNECTOR to the CABLE.
[2] At the KEYPAD press [Menu].
[3] Press the down arrow to select “Service”.
[4] Press the down arrow to select “Diagnostics”.
[5] Press the down arrow to select “Serial Port Test”.
[6] Press [Menu] to select “Serial Port Test”.
[7] Press the down arrow to select “Execute Test”.
[8] Press [Menu] to execute the test.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–25


SERVICE MANUAL

Assignment of SLOTS for the MIM 100


The following slot assignments are for the original CPU BOARD, with a RELAY BOARD and is for domestic use only.

MIM 100 with 10/100BaseT Ethernet


SLOT Type Digital Video
1 blank blank
2 PCI blank blank
3 PCI Digital BOARD 10/100 Ethernet
4 Shared 10/100 Ethernet Video 150 BOARD
5 ISA Internal MODEM Internal MODEM
6 ISA RS422 SERIAL BD RS422 SERIAL BD
7 ISA blank blank
8 ISA VGA BOARD VGA BOARD

The following slot assignments are for the original CPU BOARD, with a RELAY BOARD and is for domestic use only.

MIM 100 with the Ethernet Combo BOARD


SLOT Type Digital Video
1 blank blank
2 PCI blank blank
3 PCI Digital BOARD Video 150 BOARD
4 Shared blank blank
5 ISA Internal MODEM Internal MODEM
6 ISA RS422 SERIAL BD RS422 SERIAL BD
7 ISA Combo Ethernet BD 10 Combo Ethernet BD 10
Base Base
8 ISA VGA BOARD VGA BOARD

The following slot assignments are for the original CPU BOARD, with a RELAY BOARD and is for export only.

MIM 100 with 10/100 Base T Ethernet and ISOLATION BOARD


SLOT Type Digital Video
1 blank blank
2 PCI blank blank
3 PCI Digital BOARD 10/100 Ethernet BD
12–26 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443
Diagnostics

SLOT Type Digital Video


4 Shared 10/100 Ethernet BD Video 150 BOARD
5 ISA blank blank
6 ISA RS422 SERIAL BD RS422 SERIAL BD
7 ISA ISOLATION BD ISOLATION BD
8 ISA VGA BOARD VGA BOARD
The following slot assignments are for the original CPU BOARD and is for domestic use only.

MIM 100 (Domestic) with No RELAY BOARD


SLOT Type Digital Video
1 blank blank
2 PCI blank blank
3 PCI Digital BOARD 10/100 Ethernet BD
4 Shared 10/100 Ethernet BD Video 150 BOARD
5 ISA DISTRIBUTION BD DISTRIBUTION BD
6 ISA RS422 SERIAL BD RS422 SERIAL BD
7 ISA Internal MODEM Internal MODEM
8 ISA VGA BOARD VGA BOARD

The following slot assignments are for the original CPU BOARD and is for domestic use only.

MIM 100 with No RELAY BOARD for V_3.1.2 and Higher


SLOT Type Digital Video
1 blank blank
2 PCI blank blank
3 PCI 10/100 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet
4 Shared Digital BOARD Video 150 BOARD
5 ISA DISTRIBUTION BD DISTRIBUTION BD
6 ISA RS422 SERIAL BD RS422 SERIAL BD
7 ISA Internal MODEM Internal MODEM
8 ISA VGA BOARD VGA BOARD

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–27


SERVICE MANUAL

The following slot assignments are for the original CPU BOARD and is for Export use only.

MIM 100 with No RELAY BOARD


SLOT Type Digital Video
1 blank blank
2 PCI blank blank
3 PCI Digital BOARD 10/100 Ethernet BD
4 Shared 10/100 Ethernet BD Video 150 BOARD
5 ISA DISTRIBUTION BD DISTRIBUTION BD
6 ISA RS422 SERIAL BD RS422 SERIAL BD
7 ISA ISOLATION BOARD ISOLATION BOARD
8 ISA VGA BOARD VGA BOARD

The following slot assignments are for the new CPU BOARD and is for Export and Domestic use.

MIM 100 with Micro Industries BOARD


SLOT Type Digital Video
1 AGP Mounted 3.3 VDC Mounted 3.3 VDC
Regulator BOARD Regulator BOARD
2 PCI RS422 8 Channel RS422 8 Channel
BOARD BOARD
3 PCI blank blank
4 PCI, Shared Digital BOARD Video 150 BOARD
5 ISA, Shared blank (can’t be used blank (can’t be used
with board in slot 4) with board in slot 4)
6 ISA blank blank
7 ISA VGA BOARD VGA BOARD
8 ISA ISOLATION BD or ISOLATION BD or
Internal MODEM Internal MODEM

12–28 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagnostics

The following slot assignments are for the MIM 50 (Single Input).

MIM 50 (Single Input)


SLOT Type Digital Video
1 PCI blank blank
2 PCI blank blank
3 PCI Digital BOARD VIDEO 150 BOARD
4 ISA Power Distribution Power Distribution
BOARD BOARD
5 ISA RS422 SERIAL BD RS422 SERIAL BD
6 ISA Internal MODEM Internal MODEM
(Domestic use) (Domestic use)

The following slot assignments are for the MIM 50 (Multiple Input).

MIM 50 (Multiple Input)


SLOT Type Board
1 PCI RS422, 8 channel Comm BOARD
2 PCI Secondary Video 60 or Digital Interface BOARD
3 PCI Primary Video 60 or Digital Interface BOARD
4 ISA blank
5 ISA blank
6 ISA MODEM (Domestic use); blank (International)

DP Server
SLOT Type Board
1 PCI blank
2 PCI blank
3 PCI Fiber Optic (OI) BOARD
4 ISA Power Distribution BOARD
5 ISA RS422 SERIAL BD
6 ISA Internal MODEM (Domestic use)

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 12–29


SERVICE MANUAL

DMI Spoolers (Video, Digital, and DICOM)


SLOT Type Vidoe Digital DICOM
1 PCI Network Interface (if a 3600 Imager is Network Interface (if a 3600 Imager is Network Interface (if a 3600 Imager is
connected) connected) connected)
2 PCI blank blank blank
3 PCI Video 60 BOARD 8 MG Digital BOARD blank
4 ISA Power Distribution BOARD Power Distribution BOARD Power Distribution BOARD
5 ISA RS422 SERIAL BD RS422 SERIAL BD RS422 SERIAL BD
6 ISA Internal MODEM (Domestic use) Internal MODEM (Domestic use) Internal MODEM (Domestic use)

12–30 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


System Administration

Section 13: System Administration

Updating the Software for the MIM Products or for the Firmware

Important
Use this procedure to install the updated software to the LAPTOP for any of the following items:
• MIM Products: Application, Device Drivers, Operating System
• Firmware: Video, Digital, KEYPAD
[1] Energize the COMPUTER.
[2] Insert the FLOPPY DISK 1 into the A: DRIVE.
[3] Select the “Start/Settings/Control Panel”.
[4] Open “Add/Remove Programs”.
[5] At the “Add/Remove Programs” window, select “Install”.
[6] At the “Install Program from FLOPPY DISK or CD ROM” window, select “Next”.
[7] Check that the screen displays “A:\SETUP.EXE”.
[8] Select “Finish”.

Note
• The COMPUTER displays a “Setup” window, indicating the status of the “Install Shield”.
• The “Start Copying Files” window displays the “Target Folder: C:\ Program Files\ KHID\ Device Software Updates\ Device AX.X” where Device is either the MIM or
the FIRMWARE and “AX.X” indicates the alphanumeric version identification.
[9] At the “Start Copying Files” window, check the settings, and then select “Next”.

Note
The COMPUTER will display the progress of the installation.
[10] When the COMPUTER displays “Setup Needs the Next Disk”:
(a) Remove the existing FLOPPY DISK.
(b) Insert the next FLOPPY DISK.
(c) Select “OK”.
[11] Read the information in the “Setup Complete” screen and then select “Finish”.
[12] Eject the last setup FLOPPY DISK.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 13–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Important
The version of the Service Software must match the version of the Application Software.
[13] If necessary, advance to the procedure “Updating the Service Software for the MIM”; otherwise, advance to the procedure “Installing the New Software to the MIM”.

Installing the New Software for the MIM Products

Important
Use this procedure to install the updated software from the LAPTOP to the MIM for any of the following items:
• MIM Products:
– Application
– Device Drivers
– Operating System
• Firmware:
– Video
– Digital
– KEYPAD
[1] Connect:
(a) LAPTOP to the MIM through “Dial-Up Networking”. See Page 4–1.
(b) Service Application to the MIM. See Page 4–1.
[2] At the “Service Application” window, select “Admin/Update Software/MIM/Application”.
[3] At the “MIM Software“ window, select the correct version and then select “OK”.

Important
The COMPUTER displays the “File Transfer Progress” window. Do not abort the procedure, which takes several minutes to complete.
• Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the “File Transfer Progress” completion. During this time the “File Transfer Progress” window might indicate 1 to 2 minutes of no activity.
• After 5 to 10 minutes the COMPUTER displays the message “The MIM Software has been successfully updated. The MIM system will be restarted.” At this time,
the software automatically restarts the MIM.
• Do not select “Reconnect” when the COMPUTER displays the “Re-establish Connection” window. Wait another 2 minutes for the KEYPAD of the MIM to display
the “Acquisition” window.
[4] Wait until the KEYPAD displays the “Acquisition” screen. Then use the KEYPAD to select:

13–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


System Administration

(a) Main Menu


(b) Service
(c) View System Information
[5] At the KEYPAD, check that the correct software version displays.
[6] Close any open windows on the LAPTOP.

Reverting to a Previous Version of MIM Application Software


[1] At the “Service Application window, select “Admin’/‘Update S/W’/‘MIM’/‘Application”.
[2] At the “MIM S/W” window, select “Revert”.
[3] Select “OK”.

Note
The MIM will reboot, and the LAPTOP will display “Re-establish Connection”.
[4] After the MIM reboots, select “Reconnect” from the “Re-establish Connection” window.
[5] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Admin’/‘Update S/W’/‘MIM’/‘Application”.
[6] Check that the “current” and “previous” versions are correct and then select “Cancel”.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 13–3


SERVICE MANUAL

Enabling Software Licenses for the MIM 100, MIM 200, and MIM 50
Software Licensing is required for:
• Customer-purchased upgrades to an existing system:
– DICOM Print Output - enabling connection to PRINTERS
– DICOM Store Output - enabling connection to WORKSTATIONS and
archives
– HIS/RIS Connection - enabling connection to HIS/RIS GATEWAY
• HARD DISK replacement of a MIM with configured destinations other than
PRINTERS

Important

• Using the LAPTOP, you must enable Software Licensing (“ON” State) for
each feature before the MIM will add a DICOM Print, Store Destination, or
HIS/RIS GATEWAY.
• To obtain a Site Key to enable a feature, make a call to the TSC and provide
the information from the MIM.
[1] At the MIM Service Application window, select:
(a) “Admin”
(b) “Software Licenses”
[2] At the “Software Licenses” window, obtain the Site Code for the MIM.
[3] Record the Site Code.
[4] Call the TSC and provide the:
(a) K# of the MIM
(b) Site Code of the MIM
[5] At the “Software Licenses” window, enter the Site Key information.
[6] Select “Update”.

13–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Replacements

Section 14: Replacements

Replacing the HARD DRIVE


Procedures for Certain Replacement Versions
Version of the HARD DRIVE Important
Original Replacement Do Procedure This procedure instructs you how to install and then configure the replacement
V_A1.5, V_A1.8, V_A1.9 V_A1.10 Page 14–3 HARD DRIVE.
V_A1.11, V_A1.12 V_A1.10 Page 14–4 [1] De-energize the MIM product.
V_A1.x V_A.0 MODIFICATION Kit No. 6 [2] Replace the HARD DRIVE.
[3] Record the Windows NT Product License ID from the original HARD DRIVE
on the replacement HARD DRIVE.
[4] Energize the MIM product and wait 3 minutes.
IP Addresses by Product and Version
HARD Service Important
Product DRIVE Software IP Address Notes • You must wait 3 minutes, then connect to the MIM using Dial-Up-Networking.
MIM 100 V_A1.10 V_A1.8 100.100.100.10 See Page 4–1. The KEYPAD does not boot to the “Acquisition” screen
V_2.1 V_2.1 123.123.123.10 Combo Ethernet BD because the replacement HARD DRIVE is not configured with an input.
V_2.1 V_2.1 123.123.123.11 10/100baseT BD • See “IP Addresses by Product and Version.” If the replacement you made is
indicated in the table, do the procedure indicated before you continue to Step
V_3.0 V_3.0 123.123.123.10 Combo Ethernet BD
5.
V_3.0 V_3.0 123.123.123.11 10/100baseT BD
• Application software V_2.0 and above might require software licensing
MIM 50 V_3.0 V_3.0 123.123.123.10
before configuration. See “Enabling Software Licenses for the MIM 100, MIM
SPOOLER/ V_3.0 V_3.0 123.123.123.10 Primary IP Address: 200, and MIM 50” on Page 13–4.
DICOM Resides in Ethernet on
MOTHERBOARD [5] Connect the “MIM Service Application” to the MIM, using the version of
Service Software that corresponds to the replacement HARD DRIVE:
100.100.100.11 Secondary IP Address:
See “IP Addresses by Product and Version.”
3Com BD 3H8075
[6] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select:
(a) “Configure”
(b) “Restore Configuration”
[7] Advance to Step 8.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 14–1


SERVICE MANUAL

[8] At the “Restore Configuration Parameters” window, select [OK].

Important
The MIM must be restarted to access the “KEYPAD Acquisition” screen.
[9] At the next “Restore Configuration Parameters” window, select [OK]. The
MIM will complete the restore in about 30 seconds.
[10] At the “MIM Service Application,” select “Administration” / “Shutdown”.
[11] Select “Shutdown and Restart”.
[12] Select [OK].

Important
If the original version of the HARD DRIVE was either V_A1.11 or V_A1.12 do
Steps 7 and 8 on Page 14–4.

14–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Replacements

Updating the MIM Application Software


V_A1.5 or V_A1.8 or V_A1.9 to V_A1.10

Important
A modification must be made to the MIM file version before a restore is made.
[1] Remove the configuration FLOPPY DISKETTE from MIM.
[2] Insert the configuration FLOPPY DISKETTE in the LAPTOP FLOPPY DISKETTE DRIVE.
[3] Open the file named “MIMVersion”.

Note
“MIMVersion” is a text file with one line of information.
[4] Change the text from “A1.5” or “A1.8” or “A1.9” to “A1.10”.
[5] Save the text changes.
[6] Do Steps 8 - 10 on Page 14–1.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 14–3


SERVICE MANUAL

V_A1.11 or V_A1.12 to V_A1.10


[1] Remove the configuration FLOPPY DISKETTE from MIM.
[2] Insert the configuration FLOPPY DISKETTE in the LAPTOP FLOPPY DISKETTE DRIVE.
[3] Open the file named “MIMVersion”.

Note
“MIMVersion” is a text file with one line of information.
[4] Change the text from “A1.11” or “A1.12” to “A1.10”.
[5] Save the text changes.
[6] Do all of the following steps:
(a) Steps 8 - 10 on Page 14–1.
(b) Steps 7 and 8 below.

Important
The MIM Application Software V_A1.11 or V_A1.12 must be re-installed from the LAPTOP.
[7] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select:
(a) “Admim”
(b) “Update Software”
(c) “MIM”
(d) “Application“
[8] At the “MIM Application Update” window, select V_A1.11 or V_A1.12 and then “OK”.

14–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Replacements

Replacing the CPU BOARD of the MIM 100

Important
• Do this procedure immediately after you install a new CPU BOARD.
• The configuration of the BIOS settings of the iDE DRIVE depends on the model of the HARD DRIVE and the version of MIM Application software.
[1] De-energize the MIM.
[2] Use the LAPTOP to display the “ProComm Plus” utility.

Important
The ProComm Plus utility must be configured to communicate with the MIM BIOS:
• 19,200 baud
• 8 data bits
• No parity
• 1 stop bit
• Terminal = VT100
In the next step, do not release the SPACE BAR until the LAPTOP begins to display information about the BIOS.
[3] At the same time, hold down the SPACE BAR of the LAPTOP and energize the MIM.
[4] When the LAPTOP begins to display the information for the BIOS, press [Del] on the LAPTOP.

Important
The LAPTOP completes counting the memory and displays the main menu for the BIOS Setup utility.
Use [Tab] or [Back Space] on the LAPTOP to highlight a choice in the main menu.
[5] Select “Auto Configuration with Optimal Settings” and press [Enter].
[6] At the prompt, “Load High Performance with Optimal Settings”, select “Y” and press [Enter].
[7] When the LAPTOP displays the main menu again, select “Auto-Detect Hard Disks”, and press [Enter].
[8] At the “Standard CMOS Setup” screen, check that the screen displays the correct time and date settings. If the settings are not correct:
(a) Select the incorrect entry
(b) On the LAPTOP, use the [Shift] [+] keys to increase the value or the [-] key to decrease the value.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 14–5


SERVICE MANUAL

Settings of the Seagate Medalist IDE DRIVES


LBA BLK PIO 32-bit
Model Item Type Size Cyln. Head WPcom Sec Mode Mode Mode Mode
ST31720A (1.7 GB) Pri. Master User 1626 3305 16 65535 63 On On 4 Off
Pro 4520 ST34520A (4.5 GB) Pri. Master User 4341 9406 15 65535 63 On On 4 Off
4321 ST34321A (4.3 GB) Pri. Master User 4103 8894 15 65535 63 On On 4 Off
ST34310A (4.3 GB) Pri. Master User 4111 8354 16 65535 63 On On 4 Off

Custom Settings of the Seagate Medalist Pro 4520 Model ST34520A IDE DRIVE: Cannot “Auto Detect”
LBA BLK PIO 32-bit
Model Item Type Size Cyln. Head WPcom Sec Mode Mode Mode Mode
Pro 4520 ST34520A (4.5 GB) Pri. Master User 1626 3305 16 65535 63 On On 4 Off
Descriptions of Options for the BIOS Setup
Menu Use to: Important
Main Set up and modify the basic options; for example, Observe the labels on the HARD DRIVE for the Model and the MIM Application.
time, date, FLOPPY DRIVE, and HARD DRIVE. [9] Check that the BIOS settings of the IDE DRIVE match the values in Table
Advanced Modify advanced features such as peripheral or Table . See the labels on the HARD DRIVE.
configuration and advanced chipset configuration. [10] If the BIOS settings are incorrect, change the values to the correct values.
Security Specify a password to limit access to the system. [11] Press [Esc] to exit the “Standard CMOS Setup”.
Exit Save or discard changes.
Sub Menu Use to:
Important
HARD DRIVE Configure the HARD DRIVE. • For Release Version 3.0 only, do Steps 12 and 13.
Configuration
• For V_1.X and V_2.X, advance to Step 14 .
Boot options Modify options for the system to boot up, such as
the boot sequence. [12] Select “PCI/Plug and Play Setup” and press [Enter].
Peripheral Configuration Modify options for the SERIAL PORTS, the [13] Select “PCI IDE Busmaster” and change the setting to “Enabled”. Use the
PARALLEL PORT, and the HARD DRIVE [+] key to change the setting.
interfaces. [14] Select “Save Settings and Exit”, and press [Enter].
Advanced Chipset Modify options for memory and system buses. [15] At the prompt, “Save current settings and exit (Y/N)?)”, select “Y” and press
Configuration [Enter].
Power Management Modify options for the Advanced Power
Note
Configuration Management (APM) options.
The MIM reboots automatically.
Plug-and-Play Modify options for the system’s plug-and play
Configuration capabilities.

14–6 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Conversions for the MIM 100

Section 15: Conversions for the MIM 100

Converting Interface from Video to Digital or Digital to Video (for the MIM 100 only)
TOP VIEW
Important
When you remove or install the VIDEO or DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD, do not
touch the Lithium BATTERY on the CPU BOARD under the INTERFACE
1 2
BOARD. Accidental grounding of the BATTERY causes the BIOS time and date
to reset, preventing the KEYPAD from booting to “Acquisition” screen. If reset
occurs, see “Configuring the BIOS and Interrupts on Page 12–6.
DIGITAL INTERFACE J2
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Input/Direct
BOARD Connect”. The “Configuration” window displays.
[2] From the “Configuration” window, select “Delete”.
[3] Exit the “MIM Service Application”.
VID P3
DIG J2

[4] De-energize the MIM.

Warning
H156_0056ACB Dangerous Voltage.
H156_0056AC
[5] Disconnect the main power for the MIM.
[6] Remove the top COVER from the MIM.
[7] Loosen the 4 SCREWS on the BULKHEAD.

Note
See the ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST to locate the parts in this procedure.
[8] Carefully, pull back the BULKHEAD to provide access to the CABLE that
connects the VIDEO or DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD to the BULKHEAD.

ESD
Possible damage from electrostatic discharge.

[9] Observe the orientation of the CONNECTOR on the CABLE that connects
to J2 on the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD or to P3 on the VIDEO BOARD.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 15–1


SERVICE MANUAL

TOP VIEW [10] Disconnect the CABLES:


• DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD
– DATA CABLE
TOP VIEW
1 2 – CABLE from J2
– VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD
1 2 • VIDEO CABLE AY
VIDEO INTERFACE P3
– CABLE from P2
BOARD
P3 – CABLE from P3
VIDEO INTERFACE
BOARD • The CABLE that connects to DIGJ2 or VID P3 is a serial connection
between the RELAY BOARD and the DIGITAL or VIDEO BOARD. One

VID P3
DIG J2
function of this connection is to provide status of the temperature on the
VID P3 VIDEO (DIGITAL) BOARD to the CPU.
DIG J2

• The VID P2 CABLE provides power to the VIDEO BOARD.


H156_0056ACA [11] Remove and keep the SCREW that fasten the BOARD to the CARD RACK.
H156_0056AC
[12] Loosen the THUMBSCREW of the HOLD DOWN BRACKET.
[13] Remove the existing VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD or DIGITAL INTERFACE
BOARD.
[14] Install the replacement VIDEO INTERFACE or DIGITAL INTERFACE
BOARD. Check that you install all the correct CABLES and fasteners.
[15] Energize the MIM.
[16] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Input/Direct
Connect”. The “Configuration” window displays.
[17] Configure the MIM for the new interface.

Note
The KEYPAD does not completely boot to the “Acquisition” screen since no input
is present.

15–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Conversions for the MIM 100

Converting from 4MB DIGITAL BOARD to 8MB DIGITAL BOARD

Important

• Modalities with an image size greater than 4MB require the 8MB DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD.
• When removing and installing the VIDEO or DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD, do not touch the Lithium BATTERY that is located on the CPU BOARD under the
INTERFACE BOARD. Accidental grounding of the BATTERY causes the BIOS time and date to reset preventing the KEYPAD from booting to “Acquisition” screen.
If reset occurs, see “Configuring the BIOS and Interrupts” on Page 12–6.
[1] Connect the LAPTOP through “Dial-Up Networking”.
[2] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Input/Direct Connect”. The “Configuration” window displays.
[3] Select “View”. The “Input Parameters” window displays.
[4] Record all input parameter information.
[5] Select “Autofilming” / “View” and record the “Acquisition Parameters”.
[6] Select “Cancel”.
[7] At the “Configuration” window, select “Delete” to delete the input.
[8] Exit from the “MIM Service Application”.
[9] De-energize the MIM.

Warning
Dangerous Voltage
[10] Disconnect the main power for the MIM.
[11] Remove the top COVER from the MIM.
[12] Loosen the 4 SCREWS on the BULKHEAD.

Note
See the ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST to locate the parts in this procedure.
[13] Carefully, pull back the BULKHEAD to provide access to the CABLE that connects the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD to the BULKHEAD.

ESD
Possible damage from electrostatic discharge.

[14] Observe the orientation of the CONNECTOR on the CABLE that connects to J2 on the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD.
[15] Disconnect the CABLES:
2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 15–3
SERVICE MANUAL

• DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD


• DATA CABLE
• CABLE from J2
• The CABLE that connects to DIG J2 is a serial connection between the RELAY BOARD and the DIGITAL BOARD. One function of this connection is to provide
status of the temperature on the DIGITAL BOARD to the CPU.
[16] Remove the existing 4MB DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD.
[17] Install the replacement 8MB DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD. Check that you install all the correct CABLES and fasteners.
[18] Energize the MIM.
[19] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Input/Direct Connect”. The “Configuration” window displays.
[20] Configure the MIM for the new interface.

Note
The KEYPAD will not display the “Acquisition” screen if no input is present.
[21] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Save Configuration” to save the new parameters to DISKETTE.

15–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Conversions for the MIM 50

Section 16: Conversions for the MIM 50

Converting a MIM 50 from Single Input to Multiple Inputs


Slot Assignment for MIM 50 (Single Input)
Note
Slot Type Digital Video A MIM 50 can be upgraded to accept multiple inputs, but it's still a MIM 50. A
1 PCI HARD DRIVE with V_3.2.x is required to support multiple inputs. The appropriate
2 PCI KEYPADS are also required.
3 PCI Digital Interface Board Video 60 Board
4 ISA Power Distribution Board Power Distribution Board Important
5 ISA RS422 Comm Board RS422 Comm Board When you remove or install the VIDEO or DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD, do not
6 ISA Modem (Domestic only) Modem (Domestic only) touch the Lithium BATTERY on the CPU BOARD under the INTERFACE
BOARD. Accidental grounding of the BATTERY causes the BIOS time and date
to reset, preventing the KEYPAD from booting to the “Acquisition” screen. If reset
occurs, see “Configuring the BIOS and Interrupts” on Page 12–6.
[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Input/Direct
Connect”. The “Configuration” window displays.
[2] From the “Configuration” window, select “Delete”.
[3] Exit the “MIM Service Application”.
[4] De-energize the MIM.

Warning
Dangerous Voltage.
[5] Disconnect the main power for the MIM.
[6] Remove the top COVER from the MIM.
[7] Loosen the 4 SCREWS on the BULKHEAD.

Note
See the ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST to locate the parts in this procedure.
[8] Carefully, pull back the BULKHEAD to provide access to the CABLE that
connects the VIDEO or DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD to the BULKHEAD.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 16–1


SERVICE MANUAL

ESD
Possible damage from electrostatic discharge.

[9] Observe the orientation of the CONNECTOR on the CABLE that connects
to J2 on the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD or to P3 on the VIDEO BOARD.
[10] Disconnect the CABLES:
• DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD
– DATA CABLE
– CABLE from J2
– VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD
• VIDEO CABLE AY
– CABLE from P2
– CABLE from P3
• The CABLE that connects to DIGJ2 or VID P3 is a serial connection
between the RELAY BOARD and the DIGITAL or VIDEO BOARD. One
function of this connection is to provide status of the temperature on the
VIDEO (DIGITAL) BOARD to the CPU.
• The VID P2 CABLE provides power to the VIDEO BOARD.
[11] Remove and keep the SCREW that fastens the BOARD to the CARD
RACK.
[12] Loosen the THUMBSCREW of the HOLD DOWN BRACKET.
[13] Remove the POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD from slot 4 and the RS-422
COMM BOARD from slot 5.

16–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Conversions for the MIM 50

Slot Assignment for MIM 50 (Multiple Inputs) [14] Install the RS422 8-channel COMM BOARD in slot 1. Check that you install
Slot Type Digital Video all the correct CABLES and FASTENERS.
1 PCI RS422 8-channel Comm RS422 8-channel Comm Slot 2 remains the secondary interface for the VIDEO 60 BOARD or the DIGITAL
Board Board INTERFACE BOARD and slot 3 remains the primary interface for the VIDEO 60
BOARD or the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD.
2 PCI Secondary Digital Interface Secondary Video 60 Board
Board Note
3 PCI Primary Digital Interface Primary Video 60 Board Up to two input mono signals require a single VIDEO 60 BOARD. Digital signals
Board require two boards.
4 ISA blank blank [15] Energize the MIM.
5 ISA blank blank [16] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Input/Direct
6 ISA Modem (Domestic only) Modem (Domestic only) Connect”. The “Configuration” window displays.
Blank (International) Blank (International) [17] Configure the MIM for the new interface.
[18] Go to Page 6-1 and do the procedure "Configuring the Input for the Video
60 Board" if needed.
[19] Go to Page 8-1 and do the procedure "Configuring the Digital Input" if
needed.
[20] Install the replacement VIDEO INTERFACE or DIGITAL INTERFACE
BOARD. Check that you install all the correct CABLES and fasteners.

Note
The KEYPAD does not completely boot to the “Acquisition” screen since no input
is present.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 16–3


SERVICE MANUAL

16–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagrams

Section 17: Diagrams

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 17–1


DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443
MODEM UTP BULKHEAD
RELAY BOARD RS422
(COM 4)
J1
P1 P2
THICKWIRE KEYPAD
VIDEO VIDEO
(COM 5)
IN OUT
AUI RS232
G G P3 P3
(COM 2)
(COM 4,
COM 5)
THINWIRE
P1 P1 P4 P9
SERVICE
(COM 1)
H/C SYNC V SYNC (COM 2)
J1

A
P1 P2 P1 P3 P1 P2 P1
’TELCO’ J2 J2 J1 J70 J20 J50 J1 PIN 1
bottom CH #2 CH #1 RJ45 AUI BNC VIDEO
VIDEO

DC POWER
top bottom ETHERNET INTERFACE P2
MODEM ADAPTER
RS422 BOARD BOARD
COM 3 BOARD P6 J6
SERIAL (PCI)
(ISA) (ISA)
BOARD P5 J5 P3
(ISA)
SLOT 5 SLOT 8
COM 5 COM 4
* SLOT 7 * SLOT 3 PIN 12
(Keypad) (RS422)
COM 1 P2
SLOT 6 (SERVICE)

COM 2
P3
(RS232)
CPU BOARD
Video Interface of the MIM 100: Internal Cabling

FLOPPY P1 B
Power LED

SPEAKER PRIMARY
P1 C
IDE
FAST ETHERNET CARD (PCI): SLOT 3
* VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD (PCI): SLOT 4a P1
P1

J1D1
FAN

FAN
SERVICE MANUAL

PWR - ON SPEAKER
H156_0003EC_
LED
17–2
17–3
Diagrams

A
POWER SUPPLY
DC OUTPUT
P2

P2 J1 DATA

FLOPPY
P5 J2 POWER

B
P2 J1 DATA

HDD2
C
P4 J2 POWER (optional)

D
P3 J1 DATA
Video Interface of the MIM 100: Internal Cabling

HDD1
P3 J2 POWER

H156_0004DC_
2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00
DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443
MODEM UTP BULKHEAD RS 485 RELAY BOARD RS422
(COM 4)
J1
P1 P2
DB37
THICKWIRE KEYPAD
(COM 5)
AUI RS232
P3 P3
(COM 2)
(COM 4,
COM 5)
THINWIRE
P1 P1 P4 P9
SERVICE
(COM 1)
(COM 2)
J1

A
P1 P2 P1 P3 P1 P2 P1
’TELCO’ J2 J2 J1 J70 J20 J50 J1 PIN 1
bottom CH #2 CH #1 RJ45 AUI BNC DIGITAL
VIDEO

DC POWER
top bottom ETHERNET INTERFACE P2
MODEM ADAPTER
RS422 BOARD BOARD
COM 3 BOARD J2 P2
SERIAL (PCI)
(ISA) (ISA)
BOARD J5 P3
(ISA)
SLOT 5 SLOT 8
COM 5 COM 4 * SLOT 7 SLOT 3 PIN 12
(Keypad) (RS422)
COM 1 P2
SLOT 6 (SERVICE)

COM 2
P3
(RS232)
Digital Interface of the MIM 100: Internal Cabling

CPU BOARD

FLOPPY P1 B
Power LED

SPEAKER PRIMARY
P1 C
IDE

* FAST ETHERNET CARD (PCI): SLOT 4a


P1
P1

J1D1
FAN

FAN
SERVICE MANUAL

PWR - ON SPEAKER
H156_0002EC_
LED
17–4
17–5
Diagrams

A
POWER SUPPLY
DC OUTPUT
P2

P2 J1 DATA

FLOPPY
P5 J2 POWER

B
P2 J1 DATA

HDD2
C
P4 J2 POWER (optional)

D
P3 J1 DATA
Digital Interface of the MIM 100: Internal Cabling

HDD1
P3 J2 POWER

H156_0004DC_
2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00
DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443
UTP BULKHEAD

VIDEO VIDEO
IN OUT

MODEM G G

J1 H/C SYNC V SYNC

AUTO-
KEYPAD FILMING

RS232 SERVICE
(COM2) (COM1)
J1 J1

A
P1 P2 P1 P1 P3
J2 ’TELCO’ J2 J1 J1 J70 PIN 1
bottom CH #2 CH #1 RJ45
VIDEO
VIDEO

DC POWER
RS422 INTERFACE ETHERNET P2
ADAPTER MODEM DISTRI-
SERIAL BOARD BOARD
BOARD COM 3 BUTION P6 J6
BOARD BOARD (PCI)
(ISA) (ISA)
(ISA) P5 J5 P3
P4 J2
SLOT 8 SLOT 7 SLOT 4 SLOT 3 PIN 12
P5 J1
COM 1 P2
J12 (SERVICE)

COM 5 COM 4 SLOT 5 COM 2


(Keypad) (RS422) P3
Video Interface of the MIM 100NR: Internal Cabling

(RS232)

SLOT 6
CPU BOARD FLOPPY P1 B
Power LED

SPEAKER PRIMARY
P1 C
IDE
FAST ETHERNET CARD (PCI): SLOT 3
VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD (PCI): SLOT 4a P1
P1

J1D1
FAN

FAN
SERVICE MANUAL

PWR - ON SPEAKER
H180_0001EC_
LED
17–6
17–7
Diagrams

A
POWER SUPPLY
DC OUTPUT
P2

P2 J1 DATA

FLOPPY
P5 J2 POWER

B
P2 J1 DATA

HDD2
C
P4 J2 POWER (optional)

D
Video Interface of the MIM 100NR: Internal Cabling

P3 J1 DATA

HDD1
P3 J2 POWER

H156_0004DC_
2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00
DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443
UTP BULKHEAD RS 485

DB37

MODEM

J1

AUTO-
KEYPAD FILMING

RS232 SERVICE
(COM2) (COM1)
J1 J1

A
P1 P2 P1 P1 P3
J2 ’TELCO’ J2 J1 J1 J70 PIN 1
bottom CH #2 CH #1 RJ45 AUI BNC
DIGITAL
VIDEO

DC POWER
RS422 INTERFACE ETHERNET P2
ADAPTER MODEM DISTRI-
SERIAL BOARD BOARD
BOARD COM 3 BUTION P2
BOARD BOARD (PCI)
(ISA) (ISA)
(ISA) J5 P3
P4 J2
SLOT 8 SLOT 7 SLOT 4 SLOT 3 PIN 12
P5 J1
COM 1 P2
J12 (SERVICE)

COM 5 COM 4 SLOT 5 COM 2


(Keypad) (RS422) P3
(RS232)

SLOT 6
Digital Interface of the MIM 100NR: Internal Cabling

FLOPPY P1 B
Power LED CPU BOARD

SPEAKER PRIMARY
P1 C
IDE

P1
P1

J1D1
FAN

FAN
PWR - ON SPEAKER
H180_0002EC_
LED
SERVICE MANUAL

17–8
17–9
Diagrams

A
POWER SUPPLY
DC OUTPUT
P2

P2 J1 DATA

FLOPPY
P5 J2 POWER

B
P2 J1 DATA

HDD2
C
P4 J2 POWER (optional)

D
P3 J1 DATA
Digital Interface of the MIM 100: Internal Cabling

HDD1
P3 J2 POWER

H156_0004DC_
2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00
DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443
UTP BULKHEAD

VIDEO VIDEO
IN OUT

MODEM G G

J1 H/C SYNC V SYNC

AUTO-
KEYPAD FILMING

SERVICE
(COM1)
J1

A
P1 P1 P2
J2 ’TELCO’ J1 J1 PIN 6
bottom
VIDEO VOLTAGE
VIDEO

DC POWER
INTERFACE REGULATOR
ADAPTER MODEM RS422
BOARD BOARD
BOARD COM 3 P2 P2 SERIAL P6
(PCI) BOARD
(ISA)
Video Interface of the MIM 100 with new CPU Board: Internal Cabling

(PCI)
SLOT 8 SLOT 7 SLOT 4 SLOT 1 PIN 12
COM 5 COM 4
(Keypad) (RS422)
COM 1 J1 P2
SLOT 2 J12 (SERVICE)

CPU BOARD
FLOPPY J5 P1 B

PRIMARY J13
P1 C
IDE

P1
P1

D
J14 RJ45
J1D1
FAN

FAN
PWR - ON SPEAKER
LED
SERVICE MANUAL

H180_0003EC_
17–10
17–11
Diagrams

A
POWER SUPPLY
DC OUTPUT
P2

P2 J1 DATA

FLOPPY
P5 J2 POWER

B
P2 J1 DATA
Video Interface of the MIM 100 with new CPU Board: Internal Cabling

HDD2
C
P4 J2 POWER (optional)

D
P3 J1 DATA

HDD1
P3 J2 POWER

H180_0005DC_
2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00
DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443
UTP BULKHEAD RS 485

DB37

MODEM

J1

AUTO-
KEYPAD FILMING

SERVICE
(COM1)
J1

A
P1 P1 P2
J2 ’TELCO’ J1 J1 PIN 6
bottom
DIGITAL VOLTAGE
VIDEO

DC POWER
INTERFACE REGULATOR P6
ADAPTER MODEM RS422
BOARD BOARD
BOARD COM 3 J5 SERIAL
(PCI) BOARD
(ISA)
(PCI)
Digital Interface of the MIM 100 with new CPU Board: Internal Cabling

SLOT 8 SLOT 7 SLOT 4 SLOT 1 PIN 12


COM 5 COM 4
(Keypad) (RS422)
COM 1 J1 P2
SLOT 2 J12 (SERVICE)

CPU BOARD
FLOPPY J5 P1 B

PRIMARY J13
P1 C
IDE

P1
P1

D
J14 RJ45
J1D1
FAN

FAN
PWR - ON SPEAKER
H180_0004EC_
LED
SERVICE MANUAL

17–12
17–13
Diagrams

A
POWER SUPPLY
DC OUTPUT
P2

P2 J1 DATA

FLOPPY
P5 J2 POWER

B
P2 J1 DATA
Digital Interface of the MIM 100 with new CPU Board: Internal Cabling

HDD2
C
P4 J2 POWER (optional)

D
P3 J1 DATA

HDD1
P3 J2 POWER

H180_0005DC_
2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00
SERVICE MANUAL

MIM 100: AC Power Input and DC Power Output


POWER SUPPLY
NOISE POWER
FILTER SWITCH
RED
P2 1 +5 VDC

F1
100 - 240 VAC BLACK RED
50/60 Hz L P1-1 P2 2 +5 VDC

BLACK
P2 3 RETURN

BLACK
P2 4 RETURN

WHITE BLACK
N P1-2 P2 5 RETURN

GND ORANGE
P2 6 +12 VDC

BLUE
P2 7 -12 VDC

F2
NEUTRAL YELLOW
G P1-3 P2 8 -5 VDC

BLACK
P2 9 RETURN
GR/YEL

AC INPUT DC OUTPUT

CHASSIS GROUND STRAP


GROUND TO CPU
STUD GROUND PAD
(IF INSTALLED)

AC POWER INPUT & DC OUTPUT

NOTE: US & CAN. 3A SLOW BLOW


EUROPE 1.6A SLOW BLOW

H156_0001DC_

17–14 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagrams

Terminate Video Input


Uninstalled MIM50 or SPOOLER/Video
Video 60 Board
Important
The diagrams at left indicate various states of the VIDEO 60 BOARD depending
Video In on the configuration of the MODALITY and MONITOR at the site.
A Video Out
• A: Uninstalled MIM 50 or SPOOLER/Video
• B: Installed MIM 50 or SPOOLER/Video with terminated video (non-
Terminated Video (Non-Passthrough) passthrough) for a MODALITY with a single video output. The “Terminate
Video Input” box (for monochrome) or boxes (for RGB) must be enabled
In before you select [Set Parameters] in the “Video Board Setup” menu. A
1 75 Ohm TERMINATOR, which is not shipped with the product, must be
B Out
MONITOR MODALITY installed when the MIM 50 or SPOOLER/Video is de-energized.
– B1: Energized
Single Video Output – B2: De-energized
2 • C: Installed MIM 50 or SPOOLER/Video with terminated video (non-
B MONITOR MODALITY passthrough) for a MODALITY with multiple video outputs:
– C1: Energized
TERMINATOR
– C2: De-energized
• D: Installed MIM 50 or SPOOLER/Video with non-terminated video
In (passthrough): Same for both the Energized and De-energized states.
1
C Out
MODALITY
– D1: Energized
MONITOR – D2: De-energized

Multiple Video Output


Note
2
For a description of the “Terminate Video Input” parameter:
C MODALITY • See “Fields and [Buttons] in the “Video Board Setup” Windows” on Page 6–
MONITOR 23. for the MIM 50.
• See “Fields and [Buttons] in the “Video Board Setup” Windows” on Page 6–
Non-terminated Video (Passthrough) 31. for the SPOOLER/Video.
1
D In
and MODALITY
2 Out
D MONITOR

H174_0065CC

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 17–15


SERVICE MANUAL

RS-232/RS-422 CONVERTER

DB25F DB25M DB25F DB25M DB25M


DB15F DB15M DB15F
MIM 50, MIM 100 RS232
NULL
3.0 CHASSIS and RS422 to RS232 LOOP
MODEM
DMIS W/ CONVERTER BACK
TL-4238
JUNCTION BD. TOOL

DB15M DB25M GENDER


CHANGER
DB25F
DB15M DB15F DB9M

H156_0124BC

17–16 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagrams

Fiber optics with Hirschmann CONNECTOR for a Seimens MODALITY


CT or MR
FIBER W RS232 W MAXICAM BD.
PROTOCOL
232/422 RS232 RS232 CONTROL
CONVERTER HIRSCHMANN
HIRSCHMANN Siemens
MIM USED < 30m
MODALITY
RS485 IMAGE DATA

O
N
2 1
S1
FLUOROSPOT
or
MagicView
FIBER W RS232 W SCAM BD.
PROTOCOL
232/422 RS232 RS232 CONTROL
CONVERTER PRITZEL
PRITZEL Siemens
MIM USED > 30m
MODALITY
RS485
IMAGE DATA
H156_0125BC

Important
The RS-232/RS-422 CONVERTER 2E4145 contains 2 DIP SWITCHES. To access the DIP SWITCHES, remove the COVER on the side of the CONVERTER that has
the ACCESS HOLE.
• For the Hirschmann CONNECTOR, the 2 DIP SWITCHES must be set to the “ON” position.
• For the Pritzel CONNECTOR, the 2 DIP SWITCHES might need to be set to specific postions, depending on the model of the Pritzel CONNECTOR.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 17–17


SERVICE MANUAL

CABLES for 952 Connections

DB25M DB25F
DB15F DB15M DB15F DB15M
MIM 50, MIM 100
3.0 CHASSIS and
DMIS W/
JUNCTION BD.

RS422
LOOP
DB15M BACK
TOOL

RS422
LOOP
BACK
TOOL

H156_0129BC

CABLES for 37 PIN RS-422 Connections

DB37F DB37M DB37M DB37M


DB37 F/F
DB15M DB15F
MIM 50, MIM 100
3.0 CHASSIS and
DMIS W/
JUNCTION BD.
GENDER
CHANGER RS422
LOOP
BACK
TOOL

H156_0130BC

17–18 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagrams

CABLES for Connections of the KEYPAD

DB15F DB15M
DMIS DICOM
and KODAK DISPLAY
DPS KEYPAD
W JUNCTION BD.

RJ45
DB15F DB15M DB15F DB15M
MIM100 3.0 CHASIS
and DIGITAL/VIDEO KODAK PRINTING OR
MIM50 or DMIS KEYPAD
W JUNCTION BD.
RJ45

H156_0131BC

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 17–19


SERVICE MANUAL

HF and LF Cable Compensation Parameters


Portion of SMPTE Pattern
Important
The High Frequency (HF) repsonse occurs at the transition of BLACK and
WHITE in the SMPTE. The Low Frequency response begins at Pixel 4. For more
BLACK WHITE
information on the HF and LF Cable Compensation parameters, which you enter
in the “Gain and Offset Parameters” screen:
• See “Fields and [Buttons] in the “Video Gain and Offset Parameters”
Window” on Page 6–26. for the MIM 50.
Pixels • See “Fields and [Buttons] in the “Video Gain and Offset Parameters”
Window” on Page 6–37. for the SPOOLER/Video.

1 2 3 4 5 6

WHITE

BLACK HF LF

H174_0064GC

17–20 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagrams

SMPTE Pattern Indicating Artifacts from Swapped Fields

H174_0070HC

Important
The circled areas in the figure above indicate examples of the artifacts that occur when the “Swap Fields Option” parameter should be set to the opposite setting. For
more information regarding the “Swap Fields Option”:
• See “Fields and [Buttons] in the “Vertical Parameters” Window” on Page 6–25. for the MIM 50;
• See “Fields and [Buttons] in the “Vertical Parameters” Window” on Page 6–36. for the SPOOLER/Video.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 17–21


SERVICE MANUAL

Checking the RS422 and Keypad Connector Pinnout List


The following table shows the pinnout connection list for the internal RS422
CABLE. This CABLE is for the MIM 100 with the new CPU BOARD only.
P1
P1 Connection List
COM4
From Signal Name To
J1 J1
RS-422 J1-60 CTS+CH1 P1-01
P2
P2 J1-41 CTS-CH1 P1-10
COM5 J1-24 RXD+ CH1 P1-02
J1-43 RXD-CH1 P1-09
J1-01 +12V CH1 P1-03
J1-40 GND P1-12
H180_0043AC
J1-23 TXD+ CH1 P1-04
J1-42 TXD- CH1 P1-11
J1-21 +12V CH1 P1-03
J1-02 GND P1-13
J1-22 RTS+ CH1 P1-08
J1-03 RTS- CH1 P1-07
J1-61 GND P1-08
J1-62 GND P1-14
J1-04 GND P1-15
J1-26 RXD+ CH2 P2-02
J1-45 RXD- CH2 P2-09
J1-05 +12V CH2 P2-03
J1-63 GND P2-12
J1-25 TBX+ CH2 P2-04
J1-44 TXD- CH2 P2-11
J1-05 +12V CH2 P2-05
J1-64 GND P2-06
J1-65 GND P2-13
J1-07 GND P2-14
J1-46 GND P2-15

17–22 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Diagrams

Checking the Connector Pinnout List for the Keypad Interface Cable on the Bulkhead with the Relay Board
The following table shows the connector pinnout list for the KEYPAD INTEFACE
KEYPAD
CABLE. This CABLE is for the MIM 100 with the bulkhead with the RELAY
INTERFACE
CABLE BOARD. See the KEYPAD INTEFACE CABLE in the graphic below.

Connection List
From To Description AWG
J1-5 P1-6 RXD+ 24 AWG
J1-6 P1-7 TXD- 24 AWG
J1-7 P1-8 RXD- 24 AWG
J1-8 P1-5 TXD+ 24 AWG
J1-9 E1 RXD SHIELD 24 AWG
J1-10 E1 TXD SHIELD 24 AWG
To RS422 J1-11 P1-9 +15 VDC 22 AWG
SERIAL BOARD
J1-14 P1-12 GND 22 AWG
To CPU BOARD H156_0175ACA J1-12 P1-10 +15 VDC 22 AWG
H156_0175AC
J1-15 P1-13 GND 22 AWG
J1-13 P1-11 +15 VDC 22 AWG
J1-16 P1-14 GND 22 AWG

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 17–23


SERVICE MANUAL

Checking the Connector Pinnout List for the RS422 DB15M/DB15F Cable on the Bulkhead with no Relay Board (NR)
The following table shows the connector pinnout list for the RS422 DB15M/
KEYPAD
DB15F CABLES. These CABLES are for the MIM 100 with the bulkhead with no
RELAY BOARD. See the KEYPAD CABLE and the AUTOFILMING CABLE in the
J1 J1 graphic below.
J1 P1
Connection List
From To Description Length
J1-1 P1-1 CTS+ 9.5 in.
AUTOFILMING J1-10 P1-10 CTS- 9.5 in.
J1-2 P1-2 RXD+ 9.5 in.
J2 J2 J1-9 P1-9 RXD- 9.5 in.
J1 P1
J1-3 P1-3 +12V 9.5 in.
J1-12 P1-12 GND 9.5 in.
H156_0174AC
J1-4 P1-4 TXD+ 9.5 in.
J1-11 P1-11 TXD- 9.5 in.
J1-5 P1-5 +12 VDC 9.5 in.
J1-13 P1-13 GND 9.5 in.
J1-6 P1-6 RTS+ 9.5 in.
J1-7 P1-7 RTS- 9.5 in.
J1-8 P1-8 GND 9.5 in.
J1-14 P1-14 GND 9.5 in.
J1-15 P1-15 GND 9.5 in.

17–24 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Theory Guide

Section 18: Theory Guide

Important
For more information, see:
• Glossary in the SITE SPECIFICATIONS, No. 8B8180
• Help file for the MIM
Overview The MIM is a PC-based device that captures images from Modalities through a video or a digital interface. The MIM sends
a digital signal to a DICOM compatible destination such as the MEDICAL LASER PRINTER 190 or the DICOM PRINT
SPOOLER. See the SITE SPECIFICATIONS, No. 8B8180 for more information on system configurations. The MIM can
support either the KEYPAD Mode or the Autofilming Mode. In the Autofilming mode, the operator sends commands from
the console of the modality through a Host Control Link (HCL) to the MIM.
DICOM The DIgital COmmunications in Medicine (DICOM) standard is a detailed specification that describes the format and
protocol for sending and receiving digital imagery and text between imaging devices and destinations, for example, LASER
PRINTERS and archival systems. Imaging devices include CT, MR, Nuclear Medicine, and Ultrasound. DICOM also
addresses Computed Radiography, digitized film, video capture, HIS/RIS data, and connections for networked hardcopy
devices. DICOM is the result of a joint effort of users of the standard and the companies that manufacture medical imaging
devices.
Operating System (OS) Windows NT operates efficiently on networks, is commercially available, and is relatively inexpensive. Because no interface
exists on the MIM for Windows NT, service personnel do not need to understand how to navigate through or configure
Windows NT.
Pentium PROCESSOR: The MIM is based on an AT CPU BOARD with an AMI BIOS, and an Intel Pentium 120 MHz PROCESSOR. The 120 MHz
MIM 100 and MIM 100NR only speed is sufficient for the MIM, which is a single-input device only.
AMI BIOS The Basic Input-Output System (BIOS) is the initial boot program for the COMPUTER.
Memory The CPU BOARD contains 32 megabytes of RAM.
HARD DRIVE New The MIM contains a 1.7 gigabyte (GB) HARD DRIVE. The HARD DRIVE is separated into 4 partitions: C:, D:, E:, F:. The “C:”
partition (2 GB) is reserved for image data storage. A 1k x 1k image in a 12-up format uses about 12 megabytes (MB). One
gigabyte is sufficient space for about 83 pages of 12-up format.
The “D:” partition (500 MB) contains the Windows NT Operating System (191.4 MB) and the application software (9 MB) of
the MIM. The “E:” partition (400 MB) contains the “Pages” file. This partition temporarily stores data that the OS transfers in
or out of RAM. The “F:” partition (100 MB) contains the “Error Log” and “Activity Log” files.
Disk Management provides automatic deletion of the oldest saved image files when the HARD DRIVE becomes 75% full.
This 75% mark is named the “High Water Mark.” When enough images files are deleted so that the hard drive is 50% full,
the software stops deleting files. This 50% mark is named the “Low Water Mark.” The user can protect files from automatic
deletion. Do not adjust the High and Low Water Marks unless you are instructed to do so by the TSC.
Service Parts Management stocks the HARD DRIVE with Windows NT installed.
2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 18–1
SERVICE MANUAL

FLOPPY DRIVE The MIM contains a FLOPPY DRIVE that is used to save the configuration on a DISKETTE, which must always remain in
the DRIVE. Service personnel must always save the configuration to this DISKETTE.
CIRCUIT BOARDS See Section 17 “Diagrams” for the location and connections of CIRCUIT BOARDS in the MIM 100.
VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD Overview: See Figure .
The video modality sends analog images through a double-shielded VIDEO COAX CABLE to the input of the VIDEO
INTERFACE BOARD. The VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD contains 2 other DAUGHTER BOARDS: the GAIN DAUGHTER
BOARD, and the PHASE LOCK LOOP (PLL) DAUGHTER BOARD. The VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD has 4 video inputs.
GAIN DAUGHTER BOARD:
The PROGRAMMABLE TERMINATION and INPUT BUFFERS make each of the 4 input lines available as outputs that can
be connected to an external MONITOR through the VIDEO MUX. The PROGRAMMABLE GAIN AMPLIFIERS circuit enables
the amplitude of the signal to be increased or decreased by a software setting. The VIDEO MUX multiplexes the 4 inputs to
route one of the 4 signals to both the Analog-to-Digital Converter (A/D) and the Pixel Clock Generator sections. The MIM uses
channel one only. A future model of the MIM will use all 4 channels. The PROGRAMMABLE OFFSET circuit sets the minimum
black (pixel values near zero counts) and the GAIN circuit sets the maximum white (pixel values near the 255 counts). The
A/D CONVERTER converts the analog data of the video signal to 8-bit data.
VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD:
The FRAME BUFFER receives 8-bit data from the A/D CONVERTER and stores the data in 2 32-bit wide Memory Buffers.
For interlaced images, each field is stored in a separate memory bank. For non-interlaced images, the data is stored as one
contiguous data group. The FRAME BUFFER uses programmable counters to determine when to start and stop storing data
in memory. Vertical Counters count the number of lines in the image; horizontal counters count the number of pixels in the
horizontal direction. The FRAME BUFFER also uses counters when it transfers data to the PCI BUS. These counters enable
data from interlaced images to be converted to non-interlaced images. Software calculates the values for the counters. The
PCI BUS transfers the data to the HARD DRIVE of the MIM. The Intel MICROPROCESSOR is an 8-bit device, operating at
33 MHz. This MICROPROCESSOR controls the programmable devices and multiplexing. The host CPU transmits
commands to this MICROPROCESSOR through the PCI Bus. The VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD has 2 inputs per channel for
either external Composite Sync or external Vsync and Hsync. The EXTERNAL SYNC MULTIPLEXER multiplexes these
external sync signals for the 4 channels, routing one set of sync signals to the PLL DAUGHTER BOARD.
PLL DAUGHTER BOARD:
The PHASE LOCK LOOP (PLL) DAUGHTER BOARD generates the Pixel Clock signal. This signal clocks the A/D Converter
and operates counters in the FRAME BUFFER. The Pixel Clock Generator Section extracts the vertical and horizontal sync
(Vsync and Hsync) information from the video signal and uses a Phase-Lock Loop (PLL) circuit to generate the Pixel Clock.
The Pixel Clock has the same frequency as the frequency of the video pixel data. The PIXEL CLOCK to DATA DELAY LINE
is a programmable delay line that allows the phase between the Pixel Clock and the video pixel data to be varied.

18–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Theory Guide

VIDEO 150 BOARD


VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD for the MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100

GAIN DAUGHTER BOARD

VIDEO IN 1 PROGRAMMABLE FRAME BUFFER PCI


PROGRAMMABLE
TERMINATION GAIN INTERFACE
VIDEO MUX PROGRAMMABLE
VIDEO IN 2 AMPLIFIERS 8-BIT DATA 32-BIT DATA
AND INPUT OFFSET A/D PCI BUS
BUFFERS CONVERTER
VIDEO IN 3

VIDEO IN 4

ODD EVEN
VIDEO OUT 1
PIXEL CLOCK
VIDEO OUT 2 VIDEO MUX
VSYNC
VIDEO OUT 3 HSYNC

VIDEO OUT 4

VIDEO SYNC
EXTRACTOR PLL DAUGHTER BOARD
VSYNC 1

H/C SYNC 1 PIXEL


H/C SYNC MUX PLL
AND CLOCK SYNC
VSYNC 2 TO
VSYNC GATE SEPARATOR
DATA
H/C SYNC 2
DELAY
LINE
VSYNC 3

H/C SYNC 3

VSYNC 4
SYNC
H/C SYNC 4
INSERTER

EXTERNAL FIELD
SYNC DETECTOR
MULTIPLEXER

MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL
H156_0006EC_

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 18–3


SERVICE MANUAL

DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD The digital modality sends digital imagery through a 37-pin digital CABLE (RS485) to the high speed DIGITAL INTERFACE
BOARD. The MIM then sends the digital data using DICOM to the appointed destination. More information will be included in the
final version of the software “Help” files.

18–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Instructing the Operator and Key Operator

Section 19: Instructing the Operator and Key Operator

Introduction
After the FE installs the MIM he will be responsible for delivering instructions to the customer’s operators and key operator. Use the attached Proficiency Checklist to
ensure that you review all necessary topics with the customer.

Objectives
At the conclusion of the first 4 Modules, the Operator will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Discuss what the MIM is and some of its benefits and features.
• Identify components of the MIM.
• Energize the MIM, start and shut down the application, and de-energize the MIM.
• Operate the KEYPAD.
• Understand when to use the main screens of the KEYPAD.
• Choose a profile.
• Adjust imaging options.
• Store and print images.
• Manage image transfer.
• Create or edit a profile.
At the conclusion of the first 6 Modules, the Key Operator will be able to perform all of the above Operator tasks in addition to the following tasks:
• Adjust Tone Scaling.
• Maintain the MIM.
• Back up the configuration.
• Set the system time.
• Troubleshoot simple problems and obtain service, if necessary.
• Clean the KEYPAD and FILTER.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 19–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Training Modules
Total training time divided between lecture and hands-on:
• Basic Operator - 60 minutes
• Key Operator - 90 minutes

Module Duration User’s Manual Key/Basic Operator


1. Overview: 5 minutes Table of Contents Basic Operator / Key Operator
• Overview of the User’s Manual Appendices Ch.1
– Chapter Layout
– Appendices
• What is the MIM?
– Introducing the MIM
– Benefits and Features
• Components
– System Configuration
– Computer
– Keypad
– Footswitch or Mini Keypad
– Bulkhead
– Power Switch and Cord
– Power On LED
– Fan
2. Basic Operations 20 minutes Ch. 2. Ch. 3 Basic Operator / Key Operator
• Turning on the MIM
• Shutting Down the MIM
• Using the Keypad
• Selecting and Entering Information
• Overview of the Main Screens
• Setting System Preferences

19–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Instructing the Operator and Key Operator

Module Duration User’s Manual Key/Basic Operator


3. Working with Images: 25 minutes Ch. 4 Basic Operator / Key Operator
• Choosing a Profile
• Adjusting Imaging Options
• Storing Images
• Deleting Images and Pages
• Printing the Page
• Managing Image Transfer
4. Creating and Managing Profiles: 10 minutes Ch. 5 Basic Operator / Key Operator
• Understanding Profiles
• Planning Profiles
• Viewing Profiles
• Creating Profiles
• Editing Profiles
• Renaming Profiles
• Deleting Profiles
5. Tone Scaling: 15 minutes Ch. 6 Key Operator
• Overview
• Tone Scaling Options
• Selecting Tone Scaling Options
• Adjusting Tone Scaling Options
6. Maintaining the MIM 15 minutes Ch. 7 Key Operator
• Backing Up the Configuration
• Setting the System Time
• Troubleshooting
– Viewing System Information
– Viewing Error Logs
– Sending Test Images
• Care and Maintenance
– Cleaning the Keypad
– Removing and cleaning the filter

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 19–3


SERVICE MANUAL

Proficiency Checklist for the MIM


Overview
❏ Identify Components

Basic Operations
❏ Turning On/Shutting Down
❏ Selecting and Entering Information using the keypad
❏ Use of Screens: Acquisition, Main, Imaging Options, and Manage Profiles
❏ Set System Preferences

Working with Images


❏ Choose a profile
❏ Adjust imaging options
❏ Store images
❏ Delete images and pages
❏ Print the page
❏ Manage image transfer

Creating and Managing Profiles


❏ Plan the profile
❏ View the profile
❏ Create the profile
❏ Edit and Rename the profile
❏ Delete the profile

Tone Scaling (Key Operator)


❏ Tone Scaling options
❏ Select the Tone Scaling option
❏ Adjust the Tone Scaling option

19–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Instructing the Operator and Key Operator

Maintaining the MIM (Key Operator)


❏ Back Up the Configuration
❏ Set the system time
❏ View the system information and error logs
❏ Send a test image
❏ Clean the keypad
❏ Clean the filter

Technologist: Date:
Apps. Con. Date:

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 19–5


SERVICE MANUAL

19–6 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Providing Service Feedback

Section 20: Providing Service Feedback

SCAN Feedback
SCAN Feedback Codes
Feedback Important
Task Code Feed back the correct codes for the time you spent completing the tasks listed in
Installing the MIM and accessories, for example, the KEYPAD XN the table to the left.
Troubleshooting the equipment malfunctions during installation RAM
Assisting to solve network malfunctions NSS
Training the customer CT
Waiting on stand-by to obtain access to the Modality or the ST
network
Completing and mailing the Mod 1 Film Mailer M01

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 20–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Service Codes
MIM, DICOM PRINT SERVER, and Accessories Use the codes in the tables at left to complete service feedback.
Group Service • Feedback the installation time using the XN code.
Product Code Code Notes • Feedback the troubleshooting time using the RAM code.
MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 TBD 1539 Serialized
Mainframe
MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 2551 3433 Serialized
Mainframe
MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 50 2545 3744 Serialized
Mainframe
DICOM PRINT SERVER 2549 3745 Serialized
Mainframe
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD TBD used for KELI 160
VIDEO 150 INPUT PACKAGE 3467 NSA for MIM 100
VIDEO 60 INPUT PACKAGE 3743 SA for MIM 50 and
MIM 200
DIGITAL INPUT PACKAGE 3468 SA for MIM
MIM OPTICAL INTERFACE 3469 SA for DICOM
PRINT SERVER
and MIM 200
COMMON PROTOCOL OPTICAL 3746 NSA for KELP
INTERFACE

SPOOLER
Group Service
Product Code Code Notes
SPOOLER/DICOM 2552 3742 Serialized
Mainframe
SPOOLER/Video 2552 3750 Serialized
Mainframe
SPOOLER/Digital 2552 3751 Serialized
Mainframe

20–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Providing Service Feedback

Mod 1 FILM MAILER for Unqualified Modalities


The Mod 1 FILM MAILER is a pre-paid, addressed, express mailer to be used when servicing the MIM 100 or the MIM 50 for an unqualified modality.

Important
Enclose the following items in the Mod 1 FILM MAILER:
• 2 clinical images from the modality that you have printed using the MIM.
• One test print from the PRINTER.
• The “Modality Parameter Worksheet,” noting any changes.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 20–3


SERVICE MANUAL

20–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Glossary of Terms

Section 21: Glossary of Terms

10/100BaseT A CSMA/CD Ethernet LAN using Twisted Pair with a baseband of either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps. The IEEE standard for 24-gauge UTP for
Ethernet.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASL Adaptive Speed Leveling: ASL keeps the modem on-line, operating at the highest possible speed and constantly checking data integrity.
AUI Attachment Unit Interface: A 15-pin connector, usually with a transceiver, used with Ethernet.
AWG American Wire Gauge
CPOI Common Protocol Optical Interface
CSMA/CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access / Collision Detection
DICOM The Digital Imaging and COmmunications in Medicine imaging standard.
EIA Electrical Industries Association
Ethernet A passive coaxial cable that transmits digital signals for a network in which the interconnections contain active elements. A LAN standard
originally developed that uses a bus topology with CSMA/CD access control. A popular example of a LAN that can bridge operating systems
and ignore inherent differences in data and file structures to promote reliable interconnections.
HIS/RIS Hospital Information System / Radiology Information System
Hub A central point or concentrator in a star topology where connections meet. Network communications flow through the hub.
IP Internet Protocol
LAN Local Area Network: A combination of computer hardware and software that connects several computers and peripherals to provide
communication and access to shared data.
MIM Medical Image Manager
Modality An Imaging Device.
Modem Modulator / Demodulator: A device that your computer uses to send data over telephone wires.
Mbps Mega bits per second
NEMA plug The National Electrical Manufacturers Association’s standard 3-pronged plug.
OI Optical Interface
Pre-staged Equipment that was shipped with the modality parameters already installed and tested.
Protocol Set of rules and procedures allowing computers and peripherals to communicate with each other.
Qualified Input The modality has been field tested with correct parameters. The database in the Service Software for the MIM might also include this modality
in the Qualified list.
RJ-11 Four-wire modular connectors for phone lines.
RJ-45 Eight-wire modular connectors for Ethernet twisted-pair wiring.

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 21–1


SERVICE MANUAL

RS-232, RS-422 EIA standards for physical and electrical specifications of a serial interface between a computer and a peripheral, for example, a modem.
RS-485 EIA standard for digital data connections between devices.
SCU Service Class User.
SCP Service Class Provider.
TCP/IP Transfer Common Protocol / Internet Protocol: Set of communication protocols developed for the Defense Advanced Research Projects
Agency (DARPA) to connect dissimilar systems. The TCP controls the transfer of the data, and the IP provides the routing mechanism.
TSK Touchscreen Keypad - Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen on the MIM 100.
Twisted Pair Wiring used in telephone systems and many networks, consisting of a pair of copper wires twisted around each other to counteract the effects
of noise. Commonly used instead of coaxial Ethernet in network applications. Usually unshielded; however, the more expensive shielded
version supports greater distance with less risk of electrical interference.
Unqualified Input The modality has not been field tested.
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
WAN Wide Area Network

21–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Modality Specification Worksheet

Section 22: Modality Specification Worksheet


Video Input Modality Spec Sheet
Information for Modality
Manufacturer: Phillips
Category: CT
Model: Tomoscan Slip Ring 6000/7000/8000

Input Parameters Value


Board / Channel: 1
Logical Name: Variable
Database Name: Variable
Primary Control:
Type: Key Pad
Com Port: 5
Auxiliary Control:
Keypad: N\A
Com Port: N\A
Aspect Ratio:
Horizontal:
Vertical:
Page Pre-allocation: Enable Preallocation Do Not Select

Horizontal Parameters Value


Horizontal Line Time (uS) 31.36
Total Pixels per Line 1792
Horizontal Display Time (uS) 22.75
Image Pixels (Multiple of 4) 1300
Pixel Clock Frequency (MHz) 57.143
Horizontal Sync Width (uS) 3.00
Horizontal Front Porch (uS) .61

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 22–1


SERVICE MANUAL

Horizontal Parameters Value


Horizontal Back Porch (uS) 5.00
Horizontal Blanking 8.61

Vertical Parameters Value


Interlaced Image Interlaced
Image (active) Lines/Frame 1024H
Total Lines per Frame 1124H
Vertical Back Porch 38
Vsync Width 4.0H
Pre-Equalization Width 6.0H
Post-Equalization Width 6.0H
Serration 4
Pulses 6
Pulses 6
Interlaced Field Counter 91
Override Do Not Select
Vsync Serrations Present Yes
Double H Frequency/Eq/Serration No
Interlaced Image Yes
Swap Fields No
Async Video Compensation
Insert Serrating Pulses No
Insert Pulses Outside Vsync No
Pre Eq. H Insertion 0
Post Eq. H Insertion 0

Video Gain and Offset Parameters Value


Coarse Offset 128
Fine Offset 128
Coarse Gain 128
Fine Gain 128
Amp Offset (150 or 205) 150

22–2 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Modality Specification Worksheet

Video Sync Parameters Value


Composite Sync Channel Default
External Sync Channel Default
Positive External H or C Sync 0
Positive External Vsync 0
External Sync Level 127
Low Voltage 0
High Voltage 0

Pixel Clock Parameters Value


VCO Divisor
VCO Frequency (75-150)
Vsync Capacitor 1
Control Voltage
Pixel Clock Timing
Hsync to Clock Delay

PROM Information (Signal Generator)


PROM # 2
Program # 17

Unqualified
Qualified X

Key
Unable to Change Values

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 22–3


SERVICE MANUAL

MIM Digital Input Modality Spec Sheet (M952)


Modality Information
Manufacturer: GE
Category: MRI
Model: Signa Contour/Profile/Horizon LX

Command Port Configuration Value


Stop Bits (1 Or 2) 1
Parity (0-None, 1-Even, 2-Odd) 1
Data Length (7 Or 8) 8
Baud Rate (300, 1200, 2400, 9600) 1200
Driver Type (232 Or 422) RS-422
Async Delay (0 - 255) 0
Diagnostic Flag (0 or 1) 0

Modality Information Value


Channel Configurations M952
Host Protocol Type (Scanner Only) 6
Command Port Id. (2, 4, or 5) 2
Enable Auxiliary Keypad? No
Page Pre-allocation (Yes/No) No

Image Data Parameters Value


Line Timer: (0-59) 1
Img Parity: (0-None, 1-Even, 2-Odd) 1
Transfer Mode (1-Partial, 2-Whole) 1
Sync Mode: (1-Auto Sync, 2-No Sync) 2
Pixel Depth: 8-bit, 10-bit, 12-bit 8

Modality Parameters Value


Total Pixels Per Line: 512
Total Lines Per Image: 512

22–4 DRAFT - 18SEP00 – 2H7443


Modality Specification Worksheet

Aspect Ratio Value


Horizontal Pixel Aspect: (1 - 255) 1
Vertical Pixel Aspect: (1 - 255) 1

2H7443 – DRAFT - 18SEP00 22–5


SERVICE MANUAL

Print Date Pub. No. Affected Pages File Name Notes


APR97 2H7443 All sm3433_1_apr97.book (includes the 1st printing
files .front and .1 through .16)
09JUL98 2H7443 All sm3433_2_09jul98.book (includes the 2nd printing
files .front and .1 through .16)
29JUN99 2H7443 All sm3433_3_30jun99.book (includes the 3rd printing (Rough Draft):On-line format includes updates for the Release
files .front and .1 through .20) 3.0 Products: MIM 100, MIM 50, and the DICOM PRINT SERVER
18SEP00 2H7443 All sm3433_3_18sep00.book (includes Rev 4: Release Version 3.2.x, including data for the MIM 200.
the files 343300.fm through 343320.fm)

Kodak, Digital Science, and Ektascan are trademarks.

Printed in U.S.A. • sm343322.fm

EASTMAN KODAK COMPANY


Rochester, NY 14650

You might also like